ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

NON-AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES

REGULATIONS 2022
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING - (TRAINING INTEGRATED)

1. PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs):

I. Find employment in Core Electrical and Electronics Engineering and service sectors.
II. Get elevated to technical lead position and lead the organization
competitively.
III. Enter into higher studies leading to post-graduate and research degrees.
Become consultant and provide solutions to the practical problems of core organization.
IV. Become an entrepreneur and be part of electrical and electronics product and service
industries.

2. PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs):

After going through the four years of study, our Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Graduates will exhibit ability to:

PO# Graduate Attribute Programme Outcome

1 Engineering knowledge Apply knowledge of mathematics, basic science and
engineering science.
2 Problem analysis Identify, formulate and solve engineering problems.
3 Design/development of solutions Design an electrical system or process to improve its
performance, satisfying its constraints.
4 Conduct investigations of complex Conduct experiments in electrical and electronics
problems systems and interpret the data.
5 Modern tool usage Apply various tools and techniques to improve the
efficiency of the system.
6 The Engineer and society Conduct themselves to uphold the professional
and social obligations.
7 Environment and sustainability Design the system with environment consciousness
and sustainable development.
8 Ethics Interacting industry, business and society in a
professional and ethical manner.
9 Individual and team work Function in a multidisciplinary team.
10 Communication Proficiency in oral and written
Communication.
11 Project management and finance Implement Cost effective and improved system.
12 Life-long learning Continue professional development and learning as a
life-long activity.

1
3. PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs):

On completion of Electrical and Electronics Engineering program, the student will have the
following Program Specific Outcomes.

1. Foundation of Electrical Engineering: Ability to understand the principles and

working of electrical components, circuits, systems and control that are forming a
part of power generation, transmission, distribution, utilization, conservation and
energy saving. Students can assess the power management, auditing, crisis and
energy saving aspects.

2. Foundation of Mathematical Concepts: Ability to apply mathematical

methodologies to solve problems related with electrical engineering using
appropriate engineering tools and algorithms.

3. Computing and Research Ability: Ability to use knowledge in various domains to

identify research gaps and hence to provide solution which leads to new ideas and
innovations.

2
 PROGRAM
SPECIFIC
COURSE CODE PROGRAM OUTCOMES OUTCOMES
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12 PSO 1 PSO 2 PSO 3
Matrices and Calculus 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -

I Electric Circuit Analysis 3 3 3 2.8 2 2 1 3 3 3 3

Digital Logic Circuits 3 3 3 1 3 - - 1 - - - 1 3 1
Problem Solving and Python
2 3 3 3 2 c - - - - 2 2 3 3
Programming
Problem Solving and Python
Programming Laboratory 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3

Statistics and Numerical - - -

3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3
Methods
Electromagnetic Fields 3 2 1 2 - - 1.4 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
II Electron Devices and Circuits 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 1
Environmental Sciences and 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
Sustainability
Basic Electronics and Electrical
- 3 2.7 3 3 1.5 3 3
Circuits Laboratory
Electrical Machines - I 3 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - 1 3 3 3
Linear Integrated Circuits 2 2 3 2 2 1 - - 1 3 2 1
C Programming and Data
III 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Structures
Linear and Digital Circuits
Laboratory
3 1.6 3 3 - 1.5 - 3 3 2 1 2
C Programming and Data
2 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Structures Laboratory
Electrical Machines - II 3 3 1.6 2.3 2.6 - 1 - - - 3 3 2
IV
Transmission and Distribution 2.8 1.8 1 1 1 - 1.8 - - 3 2.4 1
Microprocessor and
Microcontroller 2 1 2 3
- 1
- - - 3 3 1 3
Electrical Machines Laboratory 3 3 1 1 1.5 1 2.8 3 3 1.6
Microprocessor and
Microcontroller laboratory
2 1 2 3 - 1.5 - 3 3 1 3

Power System Analysis 3 2.6 2.4 1.8 1.4 - 1 - 1 1 1 1.4

Measurements and
V
Instrumentation
3 2 3 2 3 2 2 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
Control Systems 3 3 3 3 3 - 1 - 3 3 3 3

3
 Control and Instrumentation 3 3 3 3 3 1.5 3 3 3
Laboratory
- - 2

Power Electronics 3 3 3 3 - 1.5 1 - 2.25 3 3 3 3

Protection and Switchgear 3 1 1 2 1.2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 1.4 1
VI Power System Operation and 2 1.6 1 1 1 1.6 2 2 3 2.2 2.86
Control
Power Electronics Laboratory 3 3 3 3 3 - 1.5 - 3 3 3
3
High Voltage Engineering 2 2 2.33 1 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 2
VII Utilization and Conservation of
2.2 2 2.6 1 1 1.5 3 3 2.5
Electrical Energy
Electric Vehicle Architecture 3 2.2 3 3 1 2 3 3 3

VIII 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Project Work
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

4
 ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
REGULATIONS 2022
B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING – (TRAINING INTEGRATED)
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
I TO VIII SEMESTERS CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS
SEMESTER I
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE CREDIT
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT
NO. CODE GORY S
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TIMA3101 Matrices and Calculus BSC 3 1 0 4 4
2. TIEE3101 Electric Circuit Analysis PCC 3 1 0 4 4
3. TIEE3102 Digital Logic Circuits PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. TIEE3103 Problem Solving and
ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Python Programming
PRACTICALS
5. TIEE3111 Problem Solving and ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Python Programming
Laboratory
TOTAL 12 2 4 18 16

SEMESTER II
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE CREDIT
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT
NO. CODE GORY S
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TIMA3201 Statistics and Numerical BSC
3 1 0 4 4
Methods
2. TIEE3201 Electromagnetic Fields PCC 3 1 0 4 4
3. TIEE3202 Electron Devices and PCC
3 0 0 3 3
Circuits
4. TIEE3203 Environmental Sciences BSC
2 0 0 2 2
and Sustainability
PRACTICALS
5. TIEE3211 Basic Electronics and PCC
Electrical Circuits 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
TOTAL 11 2 3 16 14.5

5
 SEMESTER III
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE CREDIT
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT
NO. CODE GORY S
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TIEE3301 Electrical Machines I PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. TIEE3302 Linear Integrated
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Circuits
3. TIEE3303 C programming and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Data Structures
PRACTICALS
4. TIEE3311 Linear and Digital
PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
Circuits Laboratory
5. TIEE3312 C programming and PCC
Data Structures 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
TOTAL 9 0 6 15 12

SEMESTER IV
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE CREDIT
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT
NO. CODE GORY S
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TIEE3401 Electrical Machines-II PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. TIEE3402 Transmission and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Distribution
3. TIEE3403 Microprocessor and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Microcontroller
PRACTICALS
4. TIEE3411 Electrical Machines PCC 0 0 3 3
1.5
Laboratory
5. TIEE3412 Microprocessor and PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
Microcontroller
Laboratory
TOTAL 9 0 6 15 12.0

6
 SEMESTER V
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TIEE3501 Power System Analysis PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. TIEE3502 Measurements and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Instrumentation
3. TIEE3503 Control Systems PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Professional Elective I PEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
5. TIEE3511 Control and
Instrumentation PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 12 0 4 16 14
SEMESTER VI
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TIEE3601 Power Electronics PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. TIEE3602 Protection and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Switchgear
3. TIEE3603 Power System
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Operation and Control
4. Professional Elective II PEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
5. TIEE3611 Power Electronics
PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
TOTAL 12 0 3 15 13.5
SEMESTER VII
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. TIEE3701 High Voltage
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
2. TIEE3702 Utilization and
Conservation of PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Electrical Energy
3. TIEE3703 Electric Vehicle
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Architecture
4. Professional Elective III PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective IV PEC 3 0 0 3 3
TOTAL 15 0 0 15 15
7
 SEMESTER VIII

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. Professional Elective V PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. Professional Elective VI PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. Elective- Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
4. TIEE3811 Project Work EEC 0 0 6 6 3
TOTAL 9 0 6 15 12

TOTAL CREDITS RANGE: 109

ELECTIVE - MANAGEMENT COURSES

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. TIGE3801 Principles of 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. TIGE3802 Total Quality 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. TIGE3803 Engineering Economics 3 0 0 3 3
and Financial
Accounting
4. TIGE3804 Human Resource 3 0 0 3 3
Management
5. TIGE3805 Knowledge Management 3 0 0 3 3
6. TIGE3806 Industrial Management 3 0 0 3 3

8
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES :
Converters and Drives
Power Electric Vehicle Advanced Control Diversified Courses
Professional Embedded Systems
Engineering Technology
Elective

1. Special Electrical Embedded System Design of Motor and Process Modeling and Energy Storage
Under Ground
Machines Design Power Converters Simulation Systems
Cable Engineering
for Electric Vehicles
2. Analysis of Electrical Embedded C- Electric Vehicle Computer Control of Hybrid Energy
Substation
Machines Programming Design, Mechanics Processes Technology
Engineering and
and Control
Substation
Automation
3. Multilevel Power Embedded System Identification Design and Modelling
Converters Processors Design of Electric of Renewable Energy
HVDC and FACTS Vehicle Charging Systems
System

4. Energy Electrical Drives Embedded Control for Model Based Control Grid Integrating
Testing of Electric
Management and Electric Drives Techniques and
Vehicles
Auditing Challenges
5. SMPS and UPS Smart System Non Linear Control Sustainable and
Grid Integration of
Power Quality Automation Environmental Friendly
Electric Vehicles
HV Insulation System
6. Power Electronics for Embedded System Optimal Control Power System
Intelligent control of
Smart Grids Renewable Energy for Automotive Transients
Electric Vehicles
Systems Applications
7. Control of Power VLSI Design Adaptive Control PLC Programming
Restructured
Electronics Circuits
Power Market
8. MEMS and NEMS Machine Monitoring Big Data Analytics
- -
System
9. Digital Signal
- Processing System -
- Design - -

Registration of Professional Elective Courses:

Professional Elective Courses will be registered from Semester V onwards. These courses are listed in different groups that represent a particular area of specialisation /
diversified group. Students are permitted to choose all the Professional Electives from a particular group or from different group. Further, only one Professional Elective
course shall be chosen in a semester horizontally (row-wise). However, two courses are permitted from the same row, provided one course is enrolled in Semester V and
another in semester VI.

Total number of professional elective courses per group may change in the each programme of study as 6 or 7 or 8. If there is shortage of courses in a group the same
may be chosen from another group of the same programme.

9
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES

POWER ENGINEERING

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. TIEE3001 Under Ground Cable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
2. TIEE3002 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Substation Engineering
and Automation
3. TIEE3003 HVDC and FACTS PEC 3 0 0 3 3

4. TIEE3004 Energy Management and PEC 3 0 0 3 3

Auditing
5. TIEE3005 Power Quality PEC 3 0 0 3 3

6. TIEE3006 Smart Grid PEC 3 0 0 3 3

7. TIEE3007 Restructured Power PEC 3 0 0 3 3

Market

CONVERTERS AND DRIVES

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. TIEE3008 Special Electrical PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Machines
2. TIEE3009 Analysis of Electrical PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Machines
3. TIEE3010 Multilevel Power PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Converters
4. TIEE3011 Electrical Drives PEC 2 0 2 4 3

5. TIEE3012 SMPS and UPS PEC 2 0 2 4 3

6. TIEE3013 Power Electronics for PEC 2 0 2 4 3

Renewable Energy
Systems
7. TIEE3014 Control of Power PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Electronics Circuits

10
 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. TIEE3015 Embedded System PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Design
2. TIEE3016 Embedded C- PEC 2 0 2 4 3
programming
3. TIEE3017 PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Embedded Processors
4. TIEE3018 Embedded Control for PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Electric Drives
5. TIEE3019 Smart System PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Automation
6. TIEE3020 Embedded System for PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Automotive Applications
7. TIEE3021 VLSI Design PEC 2 0 2 4 3

8. TIEE3022 MEMS and NEMS PEC 2 0 2 4 3

9. TIEE3023 Digital Signal Processing PEC 2 0 2 4 3

System Design

ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. TIEE3024 Design of Motor and PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Power Converters for
Electric Vehicles
2. TIEE3025 Electric Vehicle Design, PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Mechanics and Control
3. TIEE3026 Design of Electric Vehicle PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Charging System
4. TIEE3027 Testing of Electric PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Vehicles
5. TIEE3028 Grid Integration of PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Electric Vehicles
6. TIEE3029 Intelligent Control of PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Electric Vehicles

11
 ADVANCED CONTROL

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. Process Modeling and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
TIEE3030
Simulation
2. TIEE3031 Computer Control of PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Processes
3. TIEE3032 System Identification PEC 3 0 0 3 3

4. TIEE3033 Model Based Control PEC 3 0 0 3 3

5. TIEE3034 Non Linear Control PEC 3 0 0 3 3

6. TIEE3035 Optimal Control PEC 3 0 0 3 3

7. TIEE3036 Adaptive Control PEC 3 0 0 3 3

8. TIEE3037 Machine Monitoring PEC 3 0 0 3 3

System

DIVERSIFIED COURSES

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. TIEE3038 Energy Storage Systems PEC 3 0 0 3 3

2. TIEE3039 Hybrid Energy PEC 3 0 0 3 3

Technology
3. TIEE3040 Design and Modeling of PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Renewable Energy
Systems
4. TIEE3041 Grid integrating PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Techniques and
Challenges
5. TIEE3042 Sustainable and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Environmental Friendly
HV Insulation System
6. TIEE3043 Power System Transients PEC 3 0 0 3 3

7. TIEE3044 PLC Programming PEC 3 0 0 3 3

8. TIEE3045 Big Data Analytics PEC 2 0 2 4 3

12
 SUMMARY
CREDITS
SL. SUBJECT CREDITS PER SEMESTER
TOTAL
NO. AREA
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1. HSMC 3 3
2. BSC 4 6 10
3. ESC 5 5
4. PCC 7 8.5 12 12 11 10.5 9 70
5. PEC 3 3 6 6 18
6. OEC 0
7. EEC 3 3
Total
16 14.5 12 12 14 13.5 15 12 109

13
TIMA3101 MATRICES AND CALCULUS L T P C
3 1 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES :

 To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by engineers for practical
applications.
 To familiarize the students with differential calculus.
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in many branches
of engineering.
 To make the students understand various techniques of integration.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and
their applications.

UNIT I MATRICES 9+3

Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of Eigenvalues
and Eigenvectors – Cayley - Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices by orthogonal
transformation – Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation –
Nature of quadratic forms – Applications : Stretching of an elastic membrane.

UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3

Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules (sum,
product, quotient, chain rules) - Implicit differentiation - Logarithmic differentiation - Applications :
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.

UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change of
variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions of two
variables – Applications : Maxima and minima of functions of two variables and Lagrange’s method
of undetermined multipliers.

UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 9+3

Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration : Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial fraction,
Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals - Applications : Hydrostatic force and pressure,
moments and centres of mass.

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double and
triple integrals – Applications : Moments and centres of mass, moment of inertia.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1:Use the matrix algebra methods for solving practical problems.
CO2:Apply differential calculus tools in solving various application problems.
CO3:Able to use differential calculus ideas on several variable functions.

14
 CO4:Apply different methods of integration in solving practical problems.
CO5:Apply multiple integral ideas in solving areas, volumes and other practical problems.

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Kreyszig.E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, New
Delhi, 2016.
2. Grewal.B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 44 th Edition ,
2018.
3. James Stewart, " Calculus : Early Transcendentals ", Cengage Learning, 8th Edition,
New Delhi, 2015. [For Units II & IV - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7 (Tangents problems
only), 2.8, 3.1 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 (Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding
net change theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8 ].

REFERENCES :
1. Anton. H, Bivens. I and Davis. S, " Calculus ", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016
2. Bali. N., Goyal. M. and Watkins. C., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
3. Jain . R.K. and Iyengar. S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Narosa Publications,
New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S. and Manicavachagom Pillai. T. K., “ Calculus " Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2009.
5. Ramana. B.V., " Higher Engineering Mathematics ", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,New Delhi,
2016.
6. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia. S.C, " Engineering Mathematics " Oxford University Press, 2015.
7. Thomas. G. B., Hass. J, and Weir. M.D, " Thomas Calculus ", 14th Edition, Pearson India, 2018.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg. 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -

15
TIEE3101 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS L T P C
3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce electric circuits and its analysis
 To provide key concepts to analyze and understand electrical circuits
 To impart knowledge on solving circuit equations using network theorems
 To educate on obtaining the transient response of circuits.
 To introduce the phenomenon of resonance in coupled circuits.
 To introduce Phasor diagrams and analysis of single &three phase circuits

UNIT I BASIC CIRCUITS ANALYSIS 9+3

Fundamentals concepts of R, L and C elements-Energy Sources- Ohm’s Law -Kirchhoff ‘s Laws – DC
Circuits – Resistors in series and parallel circuits - A.C Circuits – Average and RMS Value –
Complex Impedance – Phasor diagram - Real and Reactive Power, Power Factor, Energy -Mesh
current and node voltage methods of analysis D.C and A.C Circuits.

UNIT II NETWORK REDUCTION AND THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC CIRCUITS 9+3

Network reduction: voltage and current division, source transformation – star delta conversion.
Theorems – Superposition, Thevenin’s and Norton’s Theorem – Maximum power transfer theorem –
Reciprocity Theorem – Millman's theorem- Tellegen’s Theorem-Statement, application to DC and AC
Circuits.

UNIT III TRANSIENT RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9+3

Introduction – Laplace transforms and inverse Laplace transforms- standard test signals -Transient
response of RL, RC and RLC circuits using Laplace transform for Source free, Step input and
Sinusoidal input.

UNIT IV RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 9+3

Series and parallel resonance –frequency response – Quality factor and Bandwidth – Self and mutual
inductance – Coefficient of coupling – Dot rule-Analysis of coupled circuits– Single Tuned circuits.

UNIT V THREE PHASE CIRCUITS 9+3

Analysis of three phase 3-wire and 4-wire circuits with star and delta connected loads, balanced and
unbalanced – phasor diagram of voltages and currents – power measurement in three phase circuits–
Power Factor Calculations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Explain circuit’s behavior using circuit laws.
CO2: Apply mesh analysis/ nodal analysis / network theorems to determine behavior of the given
DC and AC circuit
CO3: Compute the transient response of first order and second order systems to step and sinusoidal
input
CO4: Compute power, line/ phase voltage and currents of the given three phase circuit
CO5: Explain the frequency response of series and parallel RLC circuits
CO6: Explain the behavior of magnetically coupled circuits.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. William H. HaytJr, Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuits Analysis”,
McGraw Hill publishers, 9thedition, New Delhi, 2020.
16
2. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, Second
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2019.
3. Allan H. Robbins, Wilhelm C. Miller, “Circuit Analysis Theory and Practice”, Cengage
Learning India, 2013.

REFERENCES
1. Chakrabarti A, “Circuits Theory (Analysis and synthesis), Dhanpat Rai& Sons, New Delhi,
2020.
2 Joseph A. Edminister, Mahmood Nahvi, “Electric circuits”, Schaum’s series, McGraw-Hill,
First Edition, 2019.
4. M E Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”,Prentice-Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2015.
5. Richard C. Dorf and James A. Svoboda, “Introduction to Electric Circuits”, 7th Edition, John
Wiley Sons, Inc. 2018.
6. Sudhakar A and Shyam Mohan SP, “Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis”,
McGraHill, 2015.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 - 2 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
Avg. 3 3 3 2.8 2 - 2 1 - - - 3 3 3 3

TIEE3102 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the fundamentals of combinational and sequential digital circuits.
 To study various number systems and to simplify the mathematical expressions
using Boolean functions word problems
 To study implementation of combinational circuits using Gates` and MSI Devices.
 To study the design of various synchronous and asynchronous circuits
 To introduce digital simulation techniques for development of application oriented logic
circuit

UNIT I NUMBER SYSTEMS AND DIGITAL LOGIC FAMILIES 9

Number system, error detection, corrections & codes conversions, Boolean algebra: De-
Morgan’s theorem, switching functions and minimization using K-maps & Quine McCluskey
method - Digital Logic Families -comparison of RTL, DTL, TTL, ECL and MOS families -
operation, characteristics of digital logic family.
17
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS 9
Combinational logic - representation of logic functions-SOP and POS forms, K-map
representations - minimization using K maps - simplification and implementation of
combinational logic – multiplexers and de multiplexers - code converters, adders,
subtractors, Encoders and Decoders.

UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9

Sequential logic- SR, JK, D and T flip flops - level triggering and edge triggering - counters -
asynchronous and synchronous type - Modulo counters - Shift registers - design of
synchronous sequential circuits – Moore and Mealy models- Counters, state diagram; state
reduction; state assignment.

UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS AND PROGRAMMABILITY 9

LOGIC DEVICES
Asynchronous sequential logic Circuits-Transition stability, flow stability-race conditions,
hazards &errors in digital circuits; analysis of asynchronous sequential logic circuits-
introduction to Programmability Logic Devices: PROM – PLA –PAL, CPLD-FPGA.

UNIT V VHDL 9
RTL Design – combinational logic – Sequential circuit – Operators – Introduction to
Packages – Subprograms – Test bench. (Simulation /Tutorial Examples: adders, counters,
flip flops, Multiplexers & De multiplexers).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Explain various number systems and characteristics of digital logic families
CO2: Apply K-maps and Quine McCluskey methods to simplify the given Boolean
expressions
CO3: Explain the implementation of combinational circuit such as multiplexers and de
multiplexers - code converters, adders, subtractors, Encoders and Decoders
CO4: Design various synchronous and asynchronous circuits using Flip Flops
CO5: Explain asynchronous sequential circuits and programmable logic devices
CO6: Use VHDL for simulating and testing RTL, combinatorial and sequential circuits

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Morris Mano.M, ’Digital Logic and Computer Design’, Prentice Hall of India, 3 rdEdition, 2005.
2. Donald D.Givone, ‘Digital Principles and Design’, Tata McGraw Hill,1 st Edition, 2003
3. Thomas L Floyd, ‘Digital fundamentals’, Pearson Education Limited, 11 th Edition, 2018

REFERENCES:
1. Tocci R.J., Neal S. Widmer, ‘Digital Systems: Principles and Applications’, Pearson
Education Asia, 12th Edition, 2017.
2. Donald P Leach, Albert Paul Malvino, Goutam Sha, ‘Digital Principles and Applications’,
Tata McGraw Hill, 7th Edition, 2010.

18
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 3 3 1 3 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 3 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1
CO3 3 3 3 1 3 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1
CO4 3 3 3 1 3 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1
CO5 3 3 3 1 3 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1
Avg 3 3 3 1 3 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1

TIEE3103 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● To understand the basics of algorithmic problem solving.
● To learn to solve problems using Python conditionals and loops.
● To define Python functions and use function calls to solve problems.
● To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries to represent complex data.
● To do input/output with files in Python.

UNIT I COMPUTATIONAL THINKING AND PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Fundamentals of Computing – Identification of Computational Problems -Algorithms, building blocks of
algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo
code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for
developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card
in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.

UNIT II DATA TYPES, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9

Python interpreter and interactive mode,debugging; values and types: int, float, boolean, string, a
nd list; variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators, comments;
Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n variables,
distance between two points.

UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS, STRINGS 9

Conditionals:Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else),chained conditional (if-
elif-else);Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return
values,parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings:
string slices,immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays.

19
Illustrative programs: square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search,
binary search.

UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9

Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list parameters;
Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and methods; advanced list
processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: simple sorting, histogram, Students marks
statement, Retail bill preparation.

UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9

Files and exceptions: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file, Voter’s age validation, Marks range validation (0-100).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems.
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Write simple Python programs using conditionals and loops for solving problems.
CO4: Decompose a Python program into functions.
CO5: Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries etc.
CO6: Read and write data from/to files in Python programs.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition, O’Reilly
Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1 st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data”, Third Edition, MIT Press,
2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.

20
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
Avg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -

TIEE3111 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LT P C

004 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the problem solving approaches.
 To learn the basic programming constructs in Python.
 To practice various computing strategies for Python-based solutions to real world problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 To do input/output with files in Python.

EXPERIMENTS:
Note: The examples suggested in each experiment are only indicative. The lab instructor is
expected to design other problems on similar lines. The Examination shall not be restricted to
the sample experiments listed here.

1. Identification and solving of simple real life or scientific or technical problems, and developing
flow charts for the same. (Electricity Billing, Retail shop billing, Sin series, weight of a motorbike,
Weight of a steel bar, compute Electrical Current in Three Phase AC Circuit, etc.)
2. Python programming using simple statements and expressions (exchange the values of two
variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between two points).
3. Scientific problems using Conditionals and Iterative loops. (Number series, Number Patterns,
pyramid pattern)
4. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Lists, Tuples. (Items present in a
library/Components of a car/ Materials required for construction of a building –operations of list &
tuples)
5. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Sets, Dictionaries. (Language, components
of an automobile, Elements of a civil structure, etc.- operations of Sets & Dictionaries)
6. Implementing programs using Functions. (Factorial, largest number in a list, area of shape)
7. Implementing programs using Strings. (reverse, palindrome, character count, replacing
characters)
8. Implementing programs using written modules and Python Standard Libraries (pandas, numpy.
Matplotlib, scipy)
21
9. Implementing real-time/technical applications using File handling. (copy from one file to another,
word count, longest word)
10. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Exception handling. (divide by zero error,
voter’s age validity, student mark range validation)
11. Exploring Pygame tool.
12. Developing a game activity using Pygame like bouncing ball, car race etc.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Implement programs in Python using conditionals and loops for solving problems..
CO4: Deploy functions to decompose a Python program.
CO5: Process compound data using Python data structures.
CO6: Utilize Python packages in developing software applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python : How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition, O’Reilly
Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT Press ,
2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
Avg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -

22
TIMA3201 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C
3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few statistical and numerical
methods and give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of problems occurring in
engineering and technology.
 To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which plays an
important role in real life problems.
 To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
 To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and numerical
techniques of differentiation and integration which plays an important role in engineering and
technology disciplines.
 To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary differential
equations.

UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9+3

Sampling distributions - Tests for single mean, proportion and difference of means (Large and small
samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of variances – Chi square test for goodness of fit –
Independence of attributes.

UNIT II DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9+3

One way and two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design –
Latin square design - 22 factorial design.

UNIT III SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3

Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton Raphson
method- Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss Jordan
method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power
method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.

UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL

INTEGRATION 9 +3
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
difference interpolation – Approximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.

UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 +3

Single step methods: Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth order
Runge-Kutta method for solving first order differential equations - Multi step methods: Milne’s and
Adams - Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order differential equations.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1:Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
CO2:Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of agriculture.
CO3:Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and apply the
numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.

23
 CO4:Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
CO5:Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S., and Grewal, J.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science", Khanna
Publishers, 10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis”, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
3. Gerald. C.F. and Wheatley. P.O. "Applied Numerical Analysis” Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 7th Edition, 2007.
4. Gupta S.C. and Kapoor V. K., “ Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand & Sons,
New Delhi, 12th Edition, 2020.
5. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probability and Statistics ",
Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 4th Edition, 2012.
6. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
Scientists", 9th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2010.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
2 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
3 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
4 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
5 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg. 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -

24
TIEE3201 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS LTPC
3104
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic vector fields
 To impart knowledge on the concepts of
 Electrostatic fields, electric potential, energy density and their applications.
 Magneto static fields, magnetic flux density, vector potential and its applications.
 Different methods of emf generation and Maxwell’s equations
 Electromagnetic waves and characterizing parameters

UNIT I ELECTROSTATICS – I 12
Sources and effects of electromagnetic fields – Coordinate Systems – Vector fields –Gradient,
Divergence, Curl – theorems and applications - Coulomb’s Law – Electric field intensity – Field due to
discrete and continuous charges – Gauss’s law and applications.

UNIT II ELECTROSTATICS – II 12
Electric potential – Electric field and equipotential plots, Uniform and Non-Uniform field, Utilization
factor – Electric field in free space, conductors, dielectrics - Dielectric polarization –Dielectric strength -
Electric field in multiple dielectrics – Boundary conditions, Poisson’s and Laplace’s equations,
Capacitance, Energy density, Applications.

UNIT III MAGNETOSTATICS 12

Lorentz force, magnetic field intensity (H) – Biot–Savart’s Law - Ampere’s Circuit Law – H due to
straight conductors, circular loop, infinite sheet of current, Magnetic flux density (B) – B in free space,
conductor, magnetic materials – Magnetization, Magnetic field in multiple media –Boundary
conditions, scalar and vector potential, Poisson’s Equation, Magnetic force, Torque, Inductance,
Energy density, Applications.

UNIT IV ELECTRODYNAMIC FIELDS 12

Magnetic Circuits - Faraday’s law – Transformer and motional EMF – Displacement current -Maxwell’s
equations (differential and integral form) – Relation between field theory and circuit theory –
Applications.

UNIT V ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 12

Electromagnetic wave generation and equations – Wave parameters; velocity, intrinsic impedance,
propagation constant – Waves in free space, lossy and lossless dielectrics, conductors- skin depth -
Poynting vector – Plane wave reflection and refraction.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Visualize and explain Gradient, Divergence, and Curl operations on electromagnetic
vector fieldsand identify the electromagnetic sources and their effects.
CO2: Compute and analyse electrostatic fields, electric potential, energy density along with
their applications.
25
CO3: Compute and analyse magneto static fields, magnetic flux density, vector potential along
with their applications.
CO4: Explain different methods of emf generation and Maxwell’s equations
CO5: Explain the concept of electromagnetic waves and characterizing parameters

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mathew N. O. Sadiku, S.V. Kulkarni ‘Principles of Electromagnetics’, 6th Edition, Oxford
University Press Inc. Asian edition, 2015.
2. William H. Hayt and John A. Buck, ‘Engineering Electromagnetics’, McGraw Hill Special
Indian edition, 2014.
3. Kraus and Fleish, ‘Electromagnetics with Applications’, McGraw Hill International
Editions, Fifth Edition, 2010.

REFERENCES
1. V.V.Sarwate, ‘Electromagnetic fields and waves’, Second Edition, Newage Publishers,
2018.
2. J.P.Tewari, ‘Engineering Electromagnetics - Theory, Problems and Applications’,
Second Edition, Khanna Publishers 2013.
3. Joseph. A.Edminister, ‘Schaum’s Outline of Electromagnetics, Fifth Edition (Schaum’s
Outline Series), McGraw Hill, 2018.
4. S.P.Ghosh, Lipika Datta, ‘Electromagnetic Field Theory’, First Edition, McGraw Hill
Education(India) Private Limited, 2017.
5. K A Gangadhar, ‘Electromagnetic Field Theory’, Khanna Publishers; Sixteenth Edition Eighth
Reprint :2015

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 2 - - - - 3 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 2 - - 1 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 - - 1 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 - - 1 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 - - 1 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
Avg. 3 2 1 2 - - 1.4 1 - - - 1 3 2 1

26
TIEE3202 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the structure of basic electronic devices.
 To be exposed to active and passive circuit elements.
 To familiarize the operation and applications of transistor like BJT and FET.
 To explore the characteristics of amplifier gain and frequency response.
 To learn the required functionality of positive and negative feedback systems.

UNIT I PN JUNCTION DEVICES 9

PN junction diode –structure, operation and V-I characteristics, diffusion and transition capacitance –
Clipping & Clamping circuits - Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifier– Display devices- LED,
Laser diodes, Zener diode characteristics- Zener diode Reverse characteristics – Zener diode as
regulator.

UNIT II TRANSISTORS AND THYRISTORS 9

BJT, JFET, MOSFET- structure, operation, characteristics and Biasing UJT, Thyristors and IGBT -
Structure and characteristics.

UNIT III AMPLIFIERS 9

BJT small signal model – Analysis of CE, CB, CC amplifiers- Gain and frequency response –MOSFET
small signal model– Analysis of CS and Source follower – Gain and frequency response- High
frequency analysis.

UNIT IV MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 9

BIMOS cascade amplifier, Differential amplifier – Common mode and Difference mode analysis – FET
input stages – Single tuned amplifiers – Gain and frequency response – Neutralization methods,
power amplifiers –Types (Qualitative analysis).

UNIT V FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9

Advantages of negative feedback – voltage / current, series, Shunt feedback –positive feedback –
Condition for oscillations, phase shift – Wien bridge, Hartley, Colpitts and Crystal oscillators.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Explain the structure and operation of PN junction devices (diode, Zener diode, LED and
Laser diode)
CO2: Design clipper, clamper, half wave and full wave rectifier, regulator circuits using PN
junction diodes
CO3: Analyze the structure and characteristics BJT, FET, MOSFET, UJT, Thyristor and IGBT
CO4: Analyze the performance of various configurations of BJT and MOSFET based amplifier
CO5: Explain the characteristics of MOS based cascade and differential amplifier
CO6: Explain the operation of various feedback amplifiers and oscillators

TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Bell , ”Electronic devices and circuits”, Oxford University higher education, 5 th
edition 2008.
2. Sedra and smith, “Microelectronic circuits”,7th Edition., Oxford University Press, 2017
27
REFERENCES:
1. Balbir Kumar, Shail.B.Jain, “Electronic devices and circuits” PHI learning private limited, 2 nd
edition 2014.
2. Thomas L.Floyd, “Electronic devices” Conventional current version, Pearson prentice hall,
10th Edition, 2017.
3. Donald A Neamen, “Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design” Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition,
2003.
4. Robert L.Boylestad, “Electronic devices and circuit theory”, 11th edition, Pearson prentice
Hall 2013.
5. Robert B. Northrop, “Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to Biomedical
Instrumentation”, CRC Press, Second edition, 2012.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1
CO2 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1
CO3 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1
CO4 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1
CO5 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1
Avg. 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 - 1

TIEE3203 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND SUSTAINABILITY L T P C

2 0 0 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and emphasize
on the biodiversity of India and its conservation.
 To impart knowledge on the causes, effects and control or prevention measures of
environmental pollution and natural disasters.
 To facilitate the understanding of global and Indian scenario of renewable and nonrenewable
resources, causes of their degradation and measures to preserve them.
 To familiarize the concept of sustainable development goals and appreciate the
interdependence of economic and social aspects of sustainability, recognize and analyze
climate changes, concept of carbon credit and the challenges of environmental management.
 To inculcate and embrace sustainability practices and develop a broader understanding on
green materials, energy cycles and analyze the role of sustainable urbanization.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENT AND BIODIVERSITY 6

Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness. Eco-system and
Energy flow– ecological succession. Types of biodiversity: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity–
values of biodiversity, India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to

28
biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic
species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ.

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 6

Causes, Effects and Preventive measures of Water, Soil, Air and Noise Pollutions.
Solid, Hazardous and E-Waste management. Case studies on Occupational Health and Safety
Management system (OHASMS). Environmental protection, Environmental protection acts .

UNIT III RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY 6

Energy management and conservation, New Energy Sources: Need of new sources. Different types
new energy sources. Applications of- Hydrogen energy, Ocean energy resources, Tidal energy
conversion. Concept, origin and power plants of geothermal energy.

UNIT IV SUSTAINABILITY AND MANAGEMENT 6

Development, GDP, Sustainability- concept, needs and challenges-economic, social and aspects of
sustainability-from unsustainability to sustainability-millennium development goals, and protocols -
Sustainable Development Goals-targets, indicators and intervention areas Climate change- Global,
Regional and local environmental issues and possible solutions-case studies. Concept of Carbon
Credit, Carbon Footprint. Environmental management in industry-A case study.

UNIT V SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 6

Zero waste and R concept, Circular economy, ISO 14000 Series, Material Life cycle assessment,
Environmental Impact Assessment. Sustainable habitat: Green buildings, Green materials, Energy
efficiency, Sustainable transports. Sustainable energy: Non-conventional Sources, Energy Cycles-
carbon cycle, emission and sequestration, Green Engineering: Sustainable urbanization- Socio-
economical and technological change.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To recognize and understand the functions of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and
their conservation.
 To identify the causes, effects of environmental pollution and natural disasters and contribute
to the preventive measures in the society.
 To identify and apply the understanding of renewable and non-renewable resources and
contribute to the sustainable measures to preserve them for future generations.
 To recognize the different goals of sustainable development and apply them for suitable
technological advancement and societal development.
 To demonstrate the knowledge of sustainability practices and identify green materials, energy
cycles and the role of sustainable urbanization.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik’s “Perspectives in Environmental Studies”, 6th Edition, New
Age International Publishers ,2018.
2. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
4. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case Studies,
Prentice Hall.
5. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and
development, Cengage learning.
6. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006.

29
7. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication, London,
1998.
REFERENCES
1. R.K. Trivedi, ‘Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and Standards’,
Vol. I and II, Enviro Media. 38.
2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, ‘Environmental Encyclopedia’, Jaico Publ., House,
Mumbai, 2001.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT. LTD, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, 2005.
5. Erach Bharucha “Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses” Orient
Blackswan Pvt. Ltd. 2013.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
1 2 1 - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 2 - - - 3 3 - - - - 2 - - -
3 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
4 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
5 3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -

TIEE3211 BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS LABORATORY LTPC

0 0 3 1.5

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to understand the behavior of semiconductor device based on
experimentation.
 Be exposed to active and passive circuit elements.
 Familiarize the operation and characteristics of transistor like BJT and FET.
 Explore the characteristics of amplifier gain and frequency response.
 Learn the required functionality of positive and negative feedback systems.

Electrical Experiments:
1. Verification of series and parallel electrical circuit using fundamental laws.
2. Simulation and experimental verification of electrical circuit problems using Thevenin’s
theorem.
3. Verification of electrical circuit problems using Superposition theorem.
4. Validation of R-C,R-L and RLC electric circuit transients
5. Simulation and Experimental validation of Frequency response of RLC electric circuit.

30
6. Verification of three phase balanced and unbalanced star, delta networks circuit (Power
and Power factor calculations).

Electronics experiments:

1. V-I Characteristics of Semiconductor diode, Zener diode, photodiode, and phototransistor

2. V-I Characteristics of MOSFET
3. V-I Characteristics of UJT and generation of sawtooth waveforms
4. Design and frequency response characteristics of a Common Emitter amplifier
5. Design and testing of RC phase shift and LC oscillators
6. Single-Phase half-wave and full-wave rectifiers with capacitive filters

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Verify the fundamental laws pof electric circuits.
CO2: Verify the thorems (Thevenin’s superposition) via simulation and experimental studies.
CO3: Verify and validate the responses in PLC, RL and RLC transients and resononant circuit.
CO4: Compute power and power factor for a balanced unbalanced three phase circuits.
CO5: Analyze the characteristics of PN, Zener diode, photodiode, photo transistor and BJT in
CE, configurations experimentally
CO6: Analyze the characteristics of JFET and UJT experimentally.
CO7: Analyze the characteristics of RC phase shift and LC oscillators experimentally
CO8: Analyze the characteristics of half-wave and full-wave rectifier with and without
filters experimentally
MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 3 3 1 1 1.5 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 1 3 1.5 2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 1 1 1.5 2 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 1 - 1.5 2 3 3 1 3
CO6 3 3 2 1 - 1.5 2 3 3 2 3
CO7 3 3 2 1 - 1.5 2 3 3 2 3
CO8 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 3 3 2 3
Avg 3 3 2.3 1 0.8 1.5 2 3 3 2.3 3

31
 TIEE3301 ELECTRICAL MACHINES - I L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of electromechanical energy conversion system.
 To identify the appropriate machine for a given application based on its characteristics.
 To identify the appropriate test to determine the performance parameters of a given machine.
 To familiarize with the procedure for parallel operation of generators and transformers.
 To deliberate the working of auto transformer and three phase transformers.

UNIT I ELECTROMECHANICAL ENERGY CONVERSION 9

Fundamentals of Magnetic circuits- Statically and dynamically induced EMF - Principle of
electromechanical energy conversion forces and torque in magnetic field systems- energy balance in
magnetic circuits- magnetic force- co-energy in singly excited and multi excited magnetic field system
mmf of distributed windings – Winding Inductances-, magnetic fields in rotating machines- magnetic
saturation and leakage fluxes. Introduction to Indian Standard Specifications (ISS) - Role and
significance in testing.

UNIT II DC GENERATORS 9
Principle of operation, constructional details, armature windings and its types, EMF equation, wave
shape of induced emf, armature reaction, demagnetizing and cross magnetizing Ampere turns,
compensating winding, commutation, methods of improving commutation, interpoles, OCC and load
characteristics of different types of DC Generators. Parallel operation of DC Generators, equalizing
connections- applications of DC Generators.

UNIT III DC MOTORS 9

Principle of operation, significance of back emf, torque equations and power developed by armature,
speed control of DC motors, starting methods of DC motors, load characteristics of DC motors, losses
and efficiency in DC machine, condition for maximum efficiency. Testing of DC Machines: Brake test,
Swinburne’s test, Hopkinson's test, Field test, Retardation test, Separation of core losses-applications
of DC motors.

UNIT IV SINGLE PHASE TRANSFORMER 9

Construction and principle of operation, equivalent circuit, phasor diagrams, testing - polarity test,
open circuit and short circuit tests, voltage regulation, losses and efficiency, all day efficiency, back-to-
back test, separation of core losses, parallel operation of single-phase transformers, applications of
single-phase transformer.

UNIT V AUTOTRANSFORMER AND THREE PHASE TRANSFORMER 9

Construction and working of auto transformer, comparison with two winding transformers, applications
of autotransformer. Three Phase Transformer- Construction, types of connections and their
comparative features, Scott connection, applications of Scott connection.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

32
TEXT BOOKS
1. I. J. Nagrath and D. P. Kothari, “Electric Machines”, McGraw Hill Education, 5 th Edition, 2017.
2. P. S. Bimbhra, “Electric Machinery”, Khanna Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2021.

REFERENCES
1. A. E. Fitzgerald and C. Kingsley, "Electric Machinery”, New York, McGraw Hill Education, 6 th
Edition 2017.
2. A. E. Clayton and N. N. Hancock, “Performance and design of DC machines”, CBS
Publishers, 2018.
3. M. G. Say, “Performance and design of AC machines”, CBS Publishers, First Edition 2008.
4. Sahdev S. K. “Electrical Machines”, Cambridge University Press, 2018.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course students will be able to:
CO1: Apply the laws governing the electromechanical energy conversion for singly and multiple
excited systems.
CO2: Explain the construction and working principle of DC machines.
CO3: Interpret various characteristics of DC machines.
CO4: Compute various performance parameters of the machine, by conducting suitable tests.
CO5: Draw the equivalent circuit of transformer and predetermine the efficiency and regulation.
CO6: Describe the working principle of auto transformer, three phase transformer with
different types of connections.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - 1 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - 1 3 1 1
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - 1 3 1 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - 1 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - 1 3 3 2
CO6 3 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - 1 3 3 2
Avg 3 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - 1 3 3 3

33
TIEE3302 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following topics
• Signal analysis using Op-amp based circuits.
• Applications of Op-amp.
• Functional blocks and the applications of special ICs like Timers, PLL circuits, regulator Circuits.
• IC fabrication procedure.

UNIT I IC FABRICATION 9
IC classification, fundamental of monolithic IC technology, epitaxial growth, masking and etching,
diffusion of impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging. Fabrication of diodes, capacitance,
resistance, FETs and PV Cell.

UNIT II CHARACTERISTICS OF OPAMP 9

Ideal OP-AMP characteristics, DC characteristics, AC characteristics, differential amplifier; frequency
response of OP-AMP; Voltage-shunt feedback and inverting amplifier - Voltage series feedback: and
Non-Inverting Amplifier - Basic applications of op-amp –, summer, differentiator and Integrator-V/I & I/V
converters.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF OPAMP 9

Instrumentation amplifier and its applications for transducer Bridge, Log and Antilog Amplifiers- Analog
multiplier & Divider, first and second order active filters, comparators, multi vibrators, waveform
generators, clippers, clampers, peak detector, S/H circuit, D/A converter (R- 2R ladder and weighted
resistor types), A/D converters using OP-AMPs.

UNIT IV SPECIAL ICs 9

Functional block, characteristics of 555 Timer and its PWM application - IC-566 voltage controlled
oscillator IC; 565-phase locked loop IC, AD633 Analog multiplier ICs.

UNIT V APPLICATION ICs 9

AD623 Instrumentation Amplifier and its application as load cell weight measurement - IC voltage
regulators –LM78XX, LM79XX; Fixed voltage regulators its application as Linear power supply -
LM317, 723 Variability voltage regulators, switching regulator- SMPS - ICL 8038 function generator
IC.

TOTAL :45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Explain monolithic IC fabrication process
CO2 Explain the fabrication of diodes, capacitance, resistance, FETs and PV Cell.
CO3 Analyze the characteristics and basic applications (inverting/non-inverting amplifier, summer,
differentiator, integrator, V/I and I/V converter) of Op-Amp
CO4 Explain circuit and applications of op-amp based instrumentation amplifier, log/antilog amplifier,
analog multiplier /divider, active filters, comparators, waveform generators, A/D and D/A
converters
CO5 Explain Functional blocks, characteristics and applications of Timer, PLL, analog multiplier ICs.
34
 CO6 Explain the applications of ICs in Instrumentation amplifier, fixed and variable voltage regulator,
SMPS and function generator

TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Bell, ‘Op-amp & Linear ICs’, Oxford, Third Edition, 2011
2. D. Roy Choudhary, Sheil B. Jani, ‘Linear Integrated Circuits’, , New Age, Fourth Edition, 2018.
3. Ramakant A.Gayakward, ‘Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits’, IV edition, Pearson
Education, PHI 2021.

REFERENCES
1. Fiore,”Opamps& Linear Integrated Circuits Concepts & applications”, Cengage, 2010.
2. Floyd ,Buchla,”Fundamentals of Analog Circuits, Pearson, 2013.
3. Jacob Millman, Christos C.Halkias, ‘Integrated Electronics - Analog and Digital circuits system’,
McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2017.
4. Robert F.Coughlin, Fredrick F. Driscoll, ‘Op-amp and Linear ICs’, Pearson, 6th edition,2012.
5. Sergio Franco, ‘Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits’, McGraw Hill,
2016 – Fourth Edition.
6. Muhammad H. Rashid,’ Microelectronic Circuits Analysis and Design’ Cengage Learning, 2 nd
Edition, 2012.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
CO2 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
CO3 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
CO4 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
CO5 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 2 1
Avg 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - 1 3 2 1

35
TIEE3303 C PROGRAMMING AND DATA STRUCTURES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basics of C programming language.
 To learn the concepts of advanced features of C.
 To understand the concepts of ADTs and linear data structures.
 To know the concepts of non-linear data structure and hashing.
 To familiarize the concepts of sorting and searching techniques.

UNIT I C PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTALS (8+1 SKILL) 9

Data Types – Variables – Operations – Expressions and Statements – Conditional Statements –
Functions – Recursive Functions – Arrays – Single and Multi-Dimensional Arrays.

UNIT II C PROGRAMMING - ADVANCED FEATURES (8+1 SKILL) 9

Structures – Union – Enumerated Data Types – Pointers: Pointers to Variables, Arrays and Functions
– File Handling – Preprocessor Directives.

UNIT III LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES (8+1 SKILL) 9

Abstract Data Types (ADTs) – List ADT – Array-Based Implementation – Linked List – Doubly- Linked
Lists – Circular Linked List – Stack ADT – Implementation of Stack – Applications – Queue ADT –
Priority Queues – Queue Implementation – Applications.

UNIT IV NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES (8+1 SKILL) 9

Trees – Binary Trees – Tree Traversals – Expression Trees – Binary Search Tree – Hashing - Hash
Functions – Separate Chaining – Open Addressing – Linear Probing– Quadratic Probing – Double
Hashing – Rehashing.

UNIT V SORTING AND SEARCHING TECHNIQUES (8+1 SKILL) 9

Insertion Sort – Quick Sort – Heap Sort – Merge Sort –Linear Search – Binary Search.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 5
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Develop C programs for any real world/technical application.
CO2 Apply advanced features of C in solving problems.
CO3 Write functions to implement linear and non–linear data structure operations.
CO4 Suggest and use appropriate linear/non–linear data structure operations for solving a given
problem.
CO5 Appropriately use sort and search algorithms for a given application.
CO6 Apply appropriate hash functions that result in a collision free scenario for data storage and
retrieval.
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 1997.
2. ReemaThareja, “Programming in C”, Second Edition, Oxford University Press, 2016.

36
 REFERENCES:

1. Brian W. Kernighan, Rob Pike, “The Practice of Programming”, Pearson Education, 1999.
2. Paul J. Deitel, Harvey Deitel, “C How to Program”, Seventh Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.
3. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft, Jeffrey D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson
Education,1983.
4. Ellis Horowitz, SartajSahni and Susan Anderson, “Fundamentals of Data Structures”, Galgotia,
2008.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
https://www.coursera.org/specializations/data-structures-algorithms
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107243
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105598

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 2 1 3 2 1 3
2 1 2 1 2 2 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 3 1 2 3 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 1 2
4 2 1 - 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 2 2 3 1
5 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 2 1 3 2 2 3
Avg. 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

TIEE3311 LINEAR AND DIGITAL CIRCUITS LABORATORY LTPC

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn design, testing and characterizing of circuit behavior with combinational logic gate ICs.
 To learn design, testing and characterizing of circuit behavior with register/ counter and
sequential logic ICs.
 To learn design, testing and characterizing of circuit behavior with OPAMP ICs.
 To learn design, testing and characterizing of circuit behavior with analog Ics like 555 timer
VCO and regulators.
 To learn design, testing and characterizing of circuit behavior with digital Ics like decoders,
multiplexers.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Implementation of Boolean Functions, Adder and Subtractor circuits.
2. Code converters: Excess-3 to BCD and Binary to Gray code converter and vice-versa.
3. Parity generator and parity checking.
4. Encoders and Decoders.
5. Counters: Design and implementation of 3-bit modulo counters as synchronous and
Asynchronous types using FF IC’s and specific counter IC.

37
 6. Shift Registers: Design and implementation of 4-bit shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO,
PIPO modes using suitability IC’s.
7. Study of multiplexer and de multiplexer
8. Timer IC application: Study of NE/SE 555 timer in Astability, Monostability operation.
9. Application of Op-Amp: inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Adder, comparator, Integrator and
Differentiator.
10. Voltage to frequency characteristics of NE/ SE 566 IC.
11. Variability Voltage Regulator using IC LM317.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should have the:
CO1: Ability to understand and implement Boolean Functions.
CO2: Ability to understand the importance of code conversion
CO3: Ability to Design and implement circuits with digital ICs like decoders, multiplexers,
register.
CO4: Ability to acquire knowledge on Application of Op-Amp
CO5: Ability to Design and implement counters using analog ICs like timers, VCOs and digital
ICs like Flip-flops and counters.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 - - - 3 - - - 1.5 - - 3 3 2 1 2
CO2 - - 3 3 - - - 1.5 - - 3 3 2 1 2
CO3 - 3 2 3 3 - - 1.5 - - 3 3 2 1 2
CO4 - 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - 3 3 2 1 2
CO5 - - - - - - - 1.5 - - - 3 - - -
Avg - 3 1.6 3 3 - - 1.5 - - 3 3 2 1 2

38
 TIEE3312 C PROGRAMMING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY LTPC
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop applications in C
 To implement linear and non-linear data structures
 To understand the different operations of search trees
 To get familiarized to sorting and searching algorithms

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Practice of C programming using statements, expressions, decision making and iterative
statements
2. Practice of C programming using Functions and Arrays
3. Implement C programs using Pointers and Structures
4. Implement C programs using Files
5. Development of real time C applications
6. Array implementation of List ADT
7. Array implementation of Stack and Queue ADTs
8. Linked list implementation of List, Stack and Queue ADTs
9. Applications of List, Stack and Queue ADTs
10.Implementation of Binary Trees and operations of Binary Trees
11. Implementation of Binary Search Trees
12. Implementation of searching techniques
13. Implementation of Sorting algorithms : Insertion Sort, Quick Sort, Merge Sort
14. Implementation of Hashing – any two collision techniques

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Use different constructs of C and develop applications
CO2 Write functions to implement linear and non-linear data structure operations
CO3 Suggest and use the appropriate linear / non-linear data structure operations for a given
problem
CO4 Apply appropriate hash functions that result in a collision free scenario for data storage and
Retrieval
CO5 Implement Sorting and searching algorithms for a given application

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 2 1 3 2 1 3
2 1 2 1 2 2 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 3 1 2 3 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 1 2
4 2 1 - 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 2 2 3 1
5 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 2 1 3 2 2 3
Avg. 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

39
TIEE3401 ELECTRICAL MACHINES - II LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge on the following Topics

 Construction and performance of salient and non – salient type synchronous generators.
 Principle of operation and performance of synchronous motor.
 Construction, principle of operation and performance of induction machines.
 Starting and speed control of three-phase induction motors.
 Construction, principle of operation and performance of single phase induction motors and special
machines.

UNIT I SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR 9

Constructional details – Types of rotors –winding factors- EMF equation – Synchronous reactance –
Armature reaction – Phasor diagrams of non-salient pole synchronous generator connected to infinite
bus--Synchronizing and parallel operation – Synchronizing torque -Change of excitation and
mechanical input- Voltage regulation – EMF, MMF, ZPF and A.S.A method – steady state power-
angle characteristics– Two reaction theory –slip test -short circuit transients - Capability Curves.

UNIT II SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR 9

Principle of operation – Torque equation – Operation on infinite bus bars - V and Inverted V curves –
Power input and power developed equations – Starting methods – Current loci for constant power
input, constant excitation and constant power Developed-Hunting – natural frequency of oscillations –
damper windings- synchronous condenser.

UNIT III THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR 9

Constructional details – Types of rotors –- Principle of operation – Slip –cogging and crawling-
Equivalent circuit – Torque-Slip characteristics - Condition for maximum torque – Losses and
efficiency – Load test - No load and blocked rotor tests - Circle diagram – Separation of losses –
Double cage induction motors –Induction generators – Synchronous induction motor.

UNIT IV STARTING AND SPEED CONTROL OF THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR 9

Need for starting – Types of starters – DOL, Rotor resistance, Autotransformer and Star delta starters
– Speed control – Voltage control, Frequency control and pole changing – Cascaded Connection-V/f
control – Slip power recovery Scheme-Braking of three phase induction motor: Plugging, dynamic
braking and regenerative braking.

UNIT V SINGLE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS AND SPECIAL MACHINES 9

Constructional details of single phase induction motor – Double field revolving theory and operation –
Equivalent circuit – No load and blocked rotor test – Performance analysis – Starting methods of
single-phase induction motors – Capacitor-start capacitor run Induction motor- Shaded pole induction
motor - Linear induction motor – Repulsion motor - Hysteresis motor - AC series motor- Servo motors-
Stepper motors - introduction to magnetic levitation systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will have the:
CO1: Ability to understand the construction and working principle of Synchronous generator
CO2: Ability to understand the construction and working principle of Synchronous Motor
40
CO3: Ability to understand the construction and working principle of Three Phase Induction
Motor
CO4: Acquire knowledge about the starting and speed control of induction motors.
CO5: To gain knowledge about the basic principles and working of Single phase induction
motors and Special Electrical Machines.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. A.E. Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley, Stephen. D. Umans, ‘Electric Machinery’, Mc Graw
Hill publishing Company Ltd, 6th Education 2017.
2. Stephen J. Chapman, ‘Electric Machinery Fundamentals’4th edition, McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 4th Edition 2017.
3. D.P. Kothari and I.J. Nagrath, ‘Electric Machines’, McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, 5th Edition 2017
4. P.S. Bhimbhra, ‘Electrical Machinery’, Khanna Publishers, edition 2, 2021.

REFERENCES
1. Vincent Del Toro, ‘Basic Electric Machines’ Pearson India Education, 2016.
2. M.N. Bandyo padhyay, Electrical Machines Theory and Practice, PHI Learning PVT
LTD., New Delhi, 2011.
3. B.R.Gupta, ’Fundamental of Electric Machines’ New age International Publishers,3rd
Edition, Reprint 2015.
4. Murugesh Kumar, ‘Electric Machines’, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, First edition 2010.
5. Alexander S. Langsdorf, ‘Theory of Alternating-Current Machinery’, McGraw Hill
Publications, 2001.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 1 1 2 - - 1 - - - - 3 3 2
CO6 3 3 1 1 2 - - 1 - - - - 3 3 2
Avg 3 3 1.6 2.3 2.6 - - 1 - - - - 3 3 2

41
 TIEE3402 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

 To impart knowledge about the configuration of the electrical power systems.

 To study the line parameters and interference with neighboring circuits.
 To understand the mechanical design and performance analysis of transmission lines.
 To learn about different insulators and underground cables.
 To understand and analyze the distribution system.

UNIT I TRANSMISSION LINE PARAMETERS 9

Structure of electric power system - Parameters of single and three phase transmission lines with single
and double circuits -Resistance, inductance, and capacitance of solid, stranded, and bundled
conductors - Typical configuration, conductor types - Symmetrical and unsymmetrical spacing and
transposition – application of self and mutual GMD; skin and proximity effects - Effects of earth on the
capacitance of the transmission line - interference with neighboring communication circuits.

UNIT II MODELLING AND PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES 9

Performance of Transmission lines – short line, medium line and long line – equivalent circuits, phasor
diagram, attenuation constant, phase constant, surge impedance – transmission efficiency and voltage
regulation, real and reactive power flow in lines – Power Circle diagrams – Ferranti effect – Formation
of Corona – Critical Voltages – Effect on line Performance.

UNIT III SAG CALCULATION AND LINE SUPPORTS 9

Mechanical design of overhead lines – Line Supports –Types of towers – Tension and Sag Calculation
for different weather conditions – Methods of grounding - Insulators: Types, voltage distribution in
insulator string, improvement of string efficiency, testing of insulators.
UNIT IV NDERGROUND CABLES 9
Underground cables – Types of cables – Construction of single-core and 3-core belted cables –
Insulation Resistance – Potential Gradient – Capacitance of single-core and 3-core belted cables –
Grading of cables – Power factor and heating of cables– DC cables.

UNIT V DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 9

Distribution Systems – General Aspects – Kelvin’s Law – AC and DC distributions –Concentrated and
Distributed loading- Techniques of Voltage Control and Power factor improvement – Distribution Loss –
Types of Substations – Trends in Transmission and Distribution: EHVAC, HVDC and FACTS
(Qualitative treatment only).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.P.Kothari, I.J. Nagarath, ‘Power System Engineering’, Mc Graw-Hill Publishing Company
limited, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2019.
2. C.L.Wadhwa, ‘Electrical Power Systems’, New Age International Ltd, seventh edition 2022.
3. S.N. Singh, ‘Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution’, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. B.R.Gupta, ‘Power System Analysis and Design’ S. Chand, New Delhi, Sixth Edition, 2011.
2. Luces M.Fualken berry, Walter Coffer, ‘Electrical Power Distribution and Transmission’, Pearson
Education, 2007.
3. Arun Ingole, "Power transmission and distribution" Pearson Education, first edition, 2018
42
 4. J.Brian Hardy and Colin R.Bayliss ‘Transmission and Distribution in Electrical Engineering’,
Newnes; Fourth Edition, 2011.
5. G.Ramamurthy, “Handbook of Electrical power Distribution,” Universities Press, 2013.
6. V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta, ‘Principles of power system’, S. Chand & Company Ltd, New Delhi,
2013
7. Hadi Saadat, ‘Power System Analysis’, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 3 rd Edition,
23rd reprint, 2015.
8. R.K.Rajput, ‘A Text Book of Power System Engineering’ 2nd edition, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd,
New Delhi, 2016.

COURSE OUTCOMES
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1 : Understand the structure of power system, computation of transmission line parameters for
different configurations.
CO2 : Model the transmission lines to determine the line performance and to understand the impact
of Ferranti effect and corona on line performance.
CO3 : Do Mechanical design of transmission lines, grounding and to understand about the insulators
in transmission system.
CO4 : Design the underground cables and understand the performance analysis of underground
cable.
CO5 : Understand the modelling, performance analysis and modern trends in distribution system.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - - - 3 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 - 1 - 2 - - - - 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 - 1 - 2 - - - - 3 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 - 1 - 2 - - - - 3 3 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 - 1 - 2 - - - - 3 3 1
Avg 2.8 1.8 1 1 1 - 1.8 3 2.4 1

43
TIEE3403 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the addressing modes & instruction set of 8085 &8051
 To develop skills in simple program writing in assembly languages
 To introduce commonly used peripheral/interfacing ICs.
 To study and understand typical applications of micro-processors.
 To study and understand the typical applications of micro-controllers

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO 8085 ARCHITECTURE 9

Functional block diagram – Memory interfacing–I/O ports and data transfer concepts – Timing
Diagram – Interrupt structure.

UNIT II 8085 INSTRUCTION SET AND PROGRAMMING 9

Instruction format and addressing modes – Assembly language format – Data transfer, data
manipulation & control instructions – Programming: Loop structure with counting & Indexing - Look up
table - Subroutine instructions, stack.

UNIT III INTERFACING BASICS AND ICS 9

Study of Architecture and programming of ICs: 8255 PPI, 8259PIC, 8251USART, 8279 Keyboard
display controller and 8254 Timer/Counter – Interfacing with 8085 -A/D and D/A converter interfacing.
.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO 8051 MICROCONTROLLER 9
Functional block diagram - Instruction format and addressing modes – Interrupt structure – Timer – I/O
ports – Serial communication, Simple programming –keyboard and display interface –
Temperature control system –stepper motor control - Usage of IDE for assembly language
programming.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO RISC BASED ARCHITECTURE 9

PIC16 /18 architecture, Memory organization – Addressing modes – Instruction set -
Programming techniques – Timers – I/O ports – Interrupt programming.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, the students should have the:
CO1: Ability to write assembly language program for microprocessor and microcontroller
CO2: Ability to design and implement interfacing of peripheral with microprocessor and
microcontroller
CO3: Ability to analyze, comprehend, design and simulate microprocessor
based systems used for control and monitoring.
CO4: Ability to analyze, comprehend, design and simulate microcontroller based
systems used for control and monitoring.
CO5: Ability to understand and appreciate advanced architecture evolving microprocessor field

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Ramesh S. Gaonkar, ‘Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Application’, Pen
ram International (P)ltd., Mumbai, 6th Education, 2013.
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gilli Mazidi, ‘The 8051 Micro Controller and Embedded
Systems’, Pearson Education, Second Edition 2011.
3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gilli Mazidi, ‘The PIC Micro Controller and Embedded Systems’,

44
 2010

REFERENCES:
1. Douglas V. Hall, “Micro-processors & Interfacing”, Tata McGraw Hill 3rd Edition, 2017.
2. Krishna Kant, “Micro-processors & Micro-controllers”, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
3. Mike Predko, “8051 Micro-controllers”, McGraw Hill, 2009
4. Kenneth Ayala, ‘The 8051 Microcontroller’, Thomson, 3rd Edition 2004.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 2 1 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 3 3 1 3
CO2 2 1 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 3 3 1 3
CO3 2 1 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 3 3 1 3
CO4 2 1 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 3 3 1 3
CO5 2 1 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 3 3 1 3
Avg 2 1 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 3 3 1 3

TIEE3411 ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY LTPC

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To expose the students to determine the characteristics of DC machines and transformers by
performing experiments on these machines.
 To provide hands on experience to evaluate the performance parameters of DC machines and
transformer by conducting suitable tests.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Open circuit and load characteristics of DC shunt generator- calculation of critical resistance and
critical speed.
2. Load test on DC series motor.
3. Swinburne’s test and speed control of DC shunt motor.
4. Load test on single-phase transformer and three phase transformers.
5. Open circuit and short circuit tests on single phase transformer.
6. Regulation of three phase alternator by EMF and MMF methods.
7. V and Inverted V curves of Three Phase Synchronous Motor.
8. Load test on three-phase induction motor.
9. No load and blocked rotor tests on three-phase induction motor (Determination of
equivalent circuit parameters).
10. Load test on single-phase induction motor.
11. No load and blocked rotor test on single-phase induction motor.
12. Study of Induction Motor Starters and DC Motor starter.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

45
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course students will be able to:
CO1: Ability to understand and analyse predetermination methods of calculating regulation for
synchronous generations.
CO2: Acquire hands on experience of conducting various tests on transformers, three phase
induction motor and single phase induction motor.
CO3: Ability to acquire knowledge on separation of losses for static and induction motors.
CO4: Ability to understand the concepts related with encitating current, armature current and
power factor for a synchronous motor.
CO5: Ability to understand the performance characterizes of AC and DC machines.
CO6: Capability to understand the parameters that control the speed of DC motor.

MAPPING OF CO’S WITH PO’S AND PSO’S

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO6 2 1 1 - - 1 1 2 3 3 1
Avg. 3 3 1 1 1.5 1 2.8 3 3 1.6

TIEE3412 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LABORATORY LTPC

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To perform simple arithmetic operations using assembly language program and study the
addressing modes & instruction set of 8085 & 8051
• To develop skills in simple program writing in assembly languages
• To write an assembly language program to convert Analog input to Digital output and Digital
input to Analog output.
• To perform interfacing experiments with µP8085
• To perform interfacing experiments with µC8051.

PROGRAMMING EXERCISES / EXPERIMENTS WITH µP8085:

1. Simple arithmetic operations: Multi precision addition / subtraction /multiplication /
division.
2. Programming with control instructions: Increment / Decrement, Ascending / Descending
order, Maximum / Minimum of numbers, Rotate instructions, Hex / ASCII / BCD code
conversions.
3. Interface Experiments: A/D Interfacing. D/A Interfacing. Traffic light controller
4. Stepper motor controller interface.
5. Displaying a moving/ rolling message in the student trainer kit’s output device.

46
PROGRAMMING EXERCISES / EXPERIMENTS WITH µC8051:
6. Simple arithmetic operations with 8051: Multi precision addition / subtraction /
multiplication/ division.
7. Programming with control instructions: Increment / Decrement, Ascending / Descending.
order, Maximum / Minimum of numbers, Rotate instructions, Hex / ASCII / BCD code
conversions.
8. Interface Experiments: A/D Interfacing. D/A Interfacing. Traffic light controller
9. Stepper motor controller interface.
10. Displaying a moving/ rolling message in the student trainer kit’s output device.
11. Programming PIC architecture with software tools.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After studying the above subject, students should have the:
CO1: Ability to write assembly language program for microprocessor.
CO2: Ability to write assembly language program for microcontroller
CO3: Ability to design and implement interfacing of peripheral with microprocessor and
microcontroller
CO4: Ability to analyze, comprehend, design and simulate microprocessor based systems
used for control and monitoring..
CO5: Ability to analyze, comprehend, design and simulate microcontroller based systems used
for control and monitoring.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 2 1 2 3 - - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 1 3
CO2 2 1 2 3 - - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 1 3
CO3 2 1 2 3 - - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 1 3
CO4 2 1 2 3 - - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 1 3
CO5 2 1 2 3 - - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 1 3
Avg 2 1 2 3 - - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 1 3

47
TIEE3501 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Impact knowledge on need for operational studies, andTo model the power system
under steady state operating condition.
 To understand and apply iterative techniques for power flow analysis.
 To model of carry out short circuit studies for power system during symmetrical fault.
 To model of carry out short circuit – studies during
 To study about the various methods for analyzing power system stability

UNIT I POWER SYSTEM 9

Need for system planning and operational studies - Power scenario in India - Power system
components, Representation - Single line diagram - per unit quantities - p.u. impedance
diagram - p.u. reactance diagram, Network graph Theory - Bus incidence matrices, Primitive
parameters, Formation of bus admittance matrix – Direct inspection method – Singular
Transformation method.

UNIT II POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 9

Bus classification - Formulation of Power Flow problem in polar coordinates - Power flow
solution using Gauss Seidel method - Handling of Voltage controlled buses - Power Flow
Solution by Newton Raphson method – Flow charts – Comparison of methods.

UNIT III SYMMETRICAL FAULT ANALYSIS 9

Assumptions in short circuit analysis - Symmetrical short circuit analysis using Thevenin’s
theorem - Bus Impedance matrix building algorithm (without mutual coupling) - Symmetrical
fault analysis through bus impedance matrix - Post fault bus voltages - Fault level - Current
limiting reactors.

UNIT IV UNSYMMETRICAL FAULT ANALYSIS 9

Symmetrical components - Sequence impedances - Sequence networks - Analysis of
unsymmetrical faults at generator terminals: LG, LL and LLG - unsymmetrical fault occurring at
any point in a power system.

UNIT V STABILITY ANALYSIS 9

Classification of power system stability – Rotor angle stability - Power-Angle equation – Steady
state stability - Swing equation – Solution of swing equation by step by step method - Swing
curve, Equal area criterion - Critical clearing angle and time, Multi-machine stability analysis –
modified Euler method.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students should have the:
CO1: Ability to model the power system under steady state operating condition.
CO2: Ability to carry out power flow analysis using.
CO3: Ability to infer the significance of short circuit studies in designing circuit breakers.
CO4: Ability to analyze the state of the power system for various unsymmetrical faults.
CO5: Ability to analyze the stability of power system using different methods.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John J. Grainger, William D. Stevenson, Jr, ‘Power System Analysis’, Mc Graw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2017.

48
 2. Kothari D.P. and Nagrath I.J., ‘Power System Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, 3rd edition 2019.
3. Hadi Saadat, ‘Power System Analysis’, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 21st reprint, 2010.

REFERENCES
1. Pai M A, ‘Computer Techniques in Power System Analysis’, Tata Mc Graw-Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, Second Edition, 2007.
2. J. Duncan Glover, Mulukutla S.Sarma, Thomas J. Overbye, ‘Power System Analysis &
Design’, Cengage Learning, Fifth Edition, 2012.
3. P. Venkatesh, B. V. Manikandan, A. Srinivasan, S. Charles Raja, “Electrical Power
Systems: Analysis, Security and Deregulation” Prentice Hall India (PHI), second edition
- 2017
4. Gupta B.R., ‘Power System - Analysis and Design’, S. Chand Publishing, Reissue
edition 2005.
5. Kundur P., ‘Power System Stability and Control’, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2013
MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 - - - 1 - - - 1 - 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 - - - 1 - - - 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 - - - 1 - - 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 - - - 1 - - 1 1 1 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 - - - 1 - - 1 1 1 1
Avg 3 2.6 2.4 1.8 1.4 - - - 1 - - 1 1 1 1.4

TIEE3502 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To educate the fundamental concepts and characteristics of measurement and errors
 To impart the knowledge on the functional aspects of measuring instruments
 To infer the importance of various bridge circuits used with measuring instruments.
 To educate the fundamental working of sensors and transducers and their applications
 To summarize the overall measurement and instrumentation with the knowledge on digital
instrumentation principles.

UNIT I CONCEPTS OF MEASUREMENTS 9

Instruments: classification, applications – Elements of a generalized measurement system - Static and
dynamic characteristics - Errors in measurement -Statistical evaluation of measurement data.

UNIT II MEASUREMENT OF PARAMETERS IN ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9

Classification of instruments – moving coil and moving iron meters – Induction type, dynamometer
type watt meters – Energy meter – Megger – Instrument transformers (CT & PT).
49
UNIT III AC/DC BRIDGES AND INSTRUMENTATION AMPLIFIERS 9
Wheatstone bridge, Kelvin double bridge - Maxwell, Hay, Wien and Schering bridges – Errors and
compensation in A.C. bridges - Instrumentation Amplifiers.

UNIT IV TRANSDUCERS FOR MEASUREMENT OF NON- ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS 9

Classification of transducers – Measurement of pressure, temperature, displacement, flow, angular
velocity – Digital transducers – Smart Sensors.

UNIT V DIGITAL INSTRUMENTATION 9

A/D converters: types and characteristics – Sampling, Errors- Measurement of voltage, Current,
frequency and phase - D/A converters: types and characteristics- DSO- Data Loggers – Basics of PLC
programming and Introduction to Virtual Instrumentation - Instrument standards.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, the students should have the:
CO1: Ability to understand the fundamental art of measurement in engineering.
CO2: Ability to understand the structural elements of various instruments.
CO3: Ability to understand the importance of bridge circuits.
CO4: Ability to understand about various transducers and their characteristics by experiments.
CO5: Ability to understand the concept of digital instrumentation and virtual instrumentation by
experiments.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney ‘A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements &
Instrumentation’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, Edition 2011.
2. H.S. Kalsi, ‘Electronic Instrumentation’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010

REFERENCES:
1. M.M.S. Anand, ‘Electronics Instruments and Instrumentation Technology’, Prentice Hall India,
New Delhi, 2009
2. J.J. Carr, ‘Elements of Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement’, Pearson Education India,
New Delhi, 2011
3. W.Bolton, Programmable Logic Controllers, 6th Edition, Elseiver, 2015.
4. R.B. Northrop, ‘Introduction to Instrumentation and Measurements’, Taylor & Francis, New Delhi,
3rd Edition 2014.
5. E. O. Doebelin and D. N. Manik, “Measurement Systems – Application and Design”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 6th Edition 2017.
6. R. K. Rajput, “Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”, Chand Pub, 2016

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 2 3 - 3 2 - 2 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 3 - 3 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 - - - - 2 - - - - 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 3 2 3 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 2 3 2 3 2 - 2 - 3 - 3 3 3 3

50
TIEE3503 CONTROL SYSTEMS LT P C
3003

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students to familiarize with various representations of systems.
 To make the students to analyze the stability of linear systems in the time domain and frequency
domain.
 To make the students to analyze the stability of linear systems in the frequency domain.
 To make the students to design compensator based on the time and frequency domain
specifications.
 To develop linear models: mainly state variable model and Transfer function model

UNIT I MODELING OF LINEAR TIME INVARIANT SYSTEM (LTIV) 9

Control system: Open loop and Closed loop – Feedback control system characteristics – First
principle modeling: Mechanical, Electrical and Electromechanical systems – Transfer function
representations: Block diagram and Signal flow graph.
UNIT II TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS 9
Standard test inputs – Time response – Time domain specifications – Stability analysis: Concept of
stability – Routh Hurwitz stability criterion – Root locus: Construction and Interpretation. Effect of
adding poles and zeros
UNIT III FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS 9
Bode plot, Polar plot and Nyquist plot: – Frequency domain specifications Introduction to closed loop
Frequency Response. Effect of adding lag and lead compensators.
UNIT IV STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9
State variable formulation – Non uniqueness of state space model – State transition matrix –Eigen
values – Eigen vectors - Free and forced responses for Time Invariant and Time Varying Systems –
Controllability – Observability
UNIT V DESIGN OF FEED BACK CONTROL SYSTEM 9
Design specifications – Lead, Lag and Lag-lead compensators using Root locus and Bode plot
techniques –PID controller - Design using reaction curve and Ziegler-Nichols technique- PID control
in State Feedback form.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Represent simple systems in transfer function and state variable forms.
CO2: Analyze simple systems in time domain.
CO3: Analyze simple systems in frequency domain.
CO4: Infer the stability of systems in time and frequency domain.
CO5: Interpret characteristics of the system and find out solution for simple control problems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Benjamin C. Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, 7th edition PHI Learning Private Ltd, 2010.
2. Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal, M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International
Publishers 2010.

51
 REFERENCES:
1. Richard C.Dorf and Bishop, R.H., “Modern Control Systems”, Education Pearson, 3
Impression 2009.
2. John J.D., Azzo Constantine, H. and Houpis Sttuart, N Sheldon, “Linear Control System
Analysis and Design with MATLAB”, CRC Taylor& Francis Reprint 2009.
3. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, PHI Learning Private Ltd, 5thEdition, 2010
4. NPTEL Video Lecture Notes on “Control Engineering” by Prof.S.D.Agashe, IIT Bombay.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - 3 3 3 3
Avg. 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - 3 3 3 3

TIEE3511 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY LT P C

0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students familiarize with various representations of systems.
 To make the students analyze the stability of linear systems in the time domain and frequency
domain.
 To make the students design compensator based on the time and frequency domain
Specifications.
 To develop linear models mainly state variable model and transfer function model
 To make the students to design a complete closed loop control system for the physical
systems.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Analog (op amp based) simulation of linear differential equations.

2. Numerical Simulation of given nonlinear differential equations.
3. Real time simulation of differential equations.
4. Mathematical modeling and simulation of physical systems in at least two fields.
 Mechanical
 Electrical
 Chemical process
5. System Identification through process reaction curve.
6. Stability analysis using Pole zero maps and Routh Hurwitz Criterion in simulation platform.
52
7. Root Locus based analysis in simulation platform.
8. Determination of transfer function of a physical system using frequency response and Bode’s
asymptotes.
9. Design of Lag, lead compensators and evaluation of closed loop performance.
10. Design of PID controllers and evaluation of closed loop performance.
11. Discretization of continuous system and effect of sampling.
12. Test of controllability and observability in continuous and discrete domain in simulation platform.
13. State feedback and state observer design and evaluation of closed loop performance.
14. Mini Project 1: Simulation of complete closed loop control systems including sensor and actuator
dynamics.
15. Mini Project 2: Demonstration of a closed loop system in hardware.
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will demonstrate the ability
CO1: To model and analyze simple physical systems and simulate the performance in analog
and digital platform.
CO2: To design and implement simple controllers in standard forms.
CO3: To design compensators based on time and frequency domain specifications.
CO4: To design a complete closed control loop and evaluate its performance for simple
physical systems.
CO5: To analyze the stability of a physical system in both continuous and discrete domains.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 2 3 3 3

53
TIEE3601 POWER ELECTRONICS LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the various applications of power electronic devices for conversion, control and
conditioning of the electrical power and to get an overview of different types of power
semiconductor devices and their dynamic characteristics.
 To understand the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers
 To study the operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.
 To learn the different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand
harmonic reduction methods.
 To study the operation of AC voltage controller and various configurations of AC voltage controller.

UNIT I SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES 9

MOSFET dynamic behavior - driver and snubber circuits - low power high switching frequency
switching Power supplies, buck, boost, buck-boost converters – Isolated topologies – resonant
converters - switching loss calculations and thermal design.
UNIT II INVERTERS 9
IGBT: Static and dynamic behavior - single phase half bridge and full bridge inverters - VSI :(1phase
and three phase inverters square wave operation) - Voltage control of inverters single, multi pulse,
sinusoidal, space vector modulation techniques– various harmonic elimination techniques-CSI
UNIT III UNCONTROLLED RECTIFIERS 9
Power Diode – half wave rectifier – mid-point secondary transformer based full wave rectifier – bridge
rectifier – voltage doubler circuit – distortion factor – capacitor filter for low power rectifiers – LC filters
– Concern for power quality – three phase diode bridge.
UNIT IV CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS 9
SCR-Two transistor analogy based turn- ON – turn ON losses – thermal protection – controlled
converters (1 pulse, 2 pulse, 3 pulse, 6 pulse) - displacement factor – ripple and harmonic factor -
power factor mitigation, performance parameters – effect of source inductance - inverter angle limit.
UNIT V AC PHASE CONTROLLERS 9
TRIAC triggering concept with positive and negative gate pulse triggering, TRIAC based phase
controllers - various configurations for SCR based single and three phase controllers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the operation of semiconductor devices and dynamic characteristics and to
design &analyze the low power SMPS
CO2: Analyze the various uncontrolled rectifiers and design suitable filter circuits
CO3: Analyze the operation of the n-pulse converters and evaluate the performance
parameters
CO4: Understand various PWM techniques and apply voltage control and harmonic elimination
methods to inverter circuits.
CO5: Understand the operation of AC voltage controllers and its applications.

54
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ned Mohan, T.M.Undeland, W.P.Robbins, ”Power Electronics: Converters, applications and
design”, John Wiley and Sons, 3rd Edition (reprint), 2009
2. Rashid M.H., Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications, Prentice Hall India, 3rd
Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Cyril. W.Lander, Power Electronics, McGraw Hill International, Third Edition, 1993.
2. P.S.Bimbhra, Power Electronics, Khanna Publishers, Third Edition 2003
3. Philip T.Krein, Elements of Power Electronics, Oxford University Press, 2013.
4. P.C.Sen, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill, 30th reprint, 2008.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - - 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - 1 1 - - 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - 1 1 - - 2 3 3 3 3
Avg. 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 1 - - 2.25 3 3 3 3

55
TIEE3602 PROTECTION AND SWITCHGEAR L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the significance of protection, protection schemes and role of earthing.
 To study the characteristics, functions and application areas of various relays.
 To acquire practical knowledge about common faults in power system apparatus and
applying suitable protective schemes.
 To understand the functioning of static relays and Numerical protection concepts.
 To understand the problems associated with circuit breaking and to discuss about various
circuit breakers.

UNIT I PROTECTION SCHEMES 9

Significance and need for protective schemes – nature and causes of faults – types of faults
Effects of faults - Zones of protection and essential qualities of protection – Types of Protectionn
schemes - Power system Grounding and Methods of Grounding.

UNIT II BASICS OF RELAYS 9

Operating principles of relays –Universal torque equation - R-X diagram –Electromagnetic
Relays – Over current, Directional and non-directional, Distance, Differential, Negative sequence
and Under frequency relays.

UNIT III OVERVIEW OF EQUIPMENT PROTECTION 9

Current transformers and Potential transformers and their applications in protection schemes -
Protection of transformer, generator, motor, bus bars and transmission line.

UNIT IV STATIC RELAYS AND NUMERICAL PROTECTION 9

Static relays – Phase, Amplitude Comparators – Synthesis of various relays using Static
comparators – Block diagram of Numerical relays – Over current protection, transformer
differential protection, and distantce protection of transmission lines.

UNIT V CIRCUIT BREAKERS 9

Physics of arcing phenomenon and arc interruption – DC and AC circuit breaking – re-striking
voltage and recovery voltage - rate of rise of recovery voltage - current chopping - interruption of
capacitive current - resistance switching - Types of circuit breakers – air blast, oil, SF6 and
vacuum circuit breakers – comparison of different circuit breakers – HVDC Breaker.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will have theability to:
CO1: Understand and select proper protective scheme and type of earthing.
CO2: Explain the operating principles of various relays.
CO3: Suggest suitable protective scheme for the protection of various power system
apparatus.
CO4: Analyze the importance of static relays and numerical relays in power system
protection.
CO5: Summarize the merits and demerits and application areas of various circuit breakers.

56
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sunil S.Rao, ‘Switchgear and Protection’, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Four Edition,
2010.
2. Badri Ram ,B.H. Vishwakarma, ‘Power System Protection and Switchgear’, New Age
International Pvt Ltd Publishers, Second Edition 2011.
3. B.Rabindranath and N.Chander, ‘Power System Protection and Switchgear’, New Age
International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2018.
4. Arun Ingole, ‘Switch Gear and Protection’ Pearson Education, 2018.

REFERENCES

1. Y.G.Paithankar and S.R.Bhide, ‘Fundamentals of power system protection’, Second

Edition,Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
2. C.L.Wadhwa, ‘Electrical Power Systems’, 6th Edition, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2018
3. VK Metha,” Principles of Power Systems”, S. Chand, Reprint, 2013
4. Bhavesh Bhalja, R.P. Maheshwari, Nilesh G. Chotani,’Protection and Switchgear’ Oxford
University Press, 2nd Edition 2018.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 - 3 1 -
CO2 3 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 - 3 1 -
CO3 3 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 - 3 2 -
CO4 3 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 - 3 2 1
CO5 3 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 - 3 1 1
Avg. 3 1 1 2 1.2 2 1 1 1 1 2 - 3 1.4 1

57
 TIEE3603 POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on,
 The significance of power system operation and control.
 Real power– frequency interaction and design of power– frequency controller.
 Reactive power– voltage interaction and the compensators for maintaining the voltage profile.
 The generation scheduling and economic operation of power system.
 SCADA and its application for real time operation and control of power systems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Power scenario in Indian grid – National and Regional load dispatching centres – Requirements of
good power system – Necessity of voltage and frequency regulation – real power vs frequency and
reactive power vs voltage control loops - System load variation, load curves – Load forecasting –
Computational methods in load forecasting – Load shedding and Islanding – deregulation - Basics of
electrical energy tariff.

UNIT II REAL POWER FREQUENCY CONTROL 9

Basics of speed governing mechanisms and modelling – Speed regulation of two generators in
parallel Load Frequency Control (LFC) of single area system – Static and dynamic analysis – LFC of
two area system –Tie line modelling – Block diagram representation of two area system – Static and
dynamic analysis – Tie line with frequency bias control – State variable model – Integration of
economic dispatch control with LFC.
UNIT III REACTIVE POWER – VOLTAGE CONTROL 9
Generation and absorption of reactive power – Basics of reactive power control – Automatic Voltage
Regulator (AVR) – Brushless AC excitation system – Block diagram representation of AVR loop
static and dynamic analysis – Stability compensation – Voltage drop in transmission line – Methods
of reactive power injection – Tap changing transformer, SVC and STATCOM for voltage control.
UNIT IV ECONOMIC OPERATION OF POWER SYSTEM 9
Statement of economic dispatch problem – Input and output characteristics of thermal plant
incremental cost curve – Optimal operation of thermal units without and with transmission losses (no
derivation of transmission loss coefficients) – Lambda–iteration method – Base point and
participation factors method. Statement of Unit Commitment (UC) problem – Constraints on UC
problem – Solution of UC problem using priority list – Special aspects of short term and long-term
hydrothermal scheduling problems.
UNIT V COMPUTER AIDED CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEM 9
Need of computer control of power system – Concept of energy control centers and functions – PMU
system monitoring, Data acquisition and controls – System hardware configurations – SCADA and
EMS functions – State estimation – Measurements and errors – Weighted least square estimation –
Various operating states – State transition diagram.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

58
 COURSE OUTCOMES:
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the day – to – day operation of power system.
CO2: Model and analyse the control actions that are implemented to meet the minute-to-
minute variation of system real power demand.
CO3: Model and analyze the compensators for reactive power control and various
devices used for voltage control.
CO4: Prepare day ahead and real time economic generation scheduling.
CO5: Understand the necessity of computer control of power systems.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Olle. I. Elgerd, ‘Electric Energy Systems theory – An introduction’, McGraw Hill Education Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd edition, 2017.
2. Allen. J. Wood and Bruce F. Wollen berg, ‘Power Generation, Operation and Control’, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., 3rd edition, 2013.
3. Abhijit Chakrabarti and Sunita Halder, ‘Power System Analysis Operation and Control’, PHI
learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Fourth Edition, 2018.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kothari D.P. and Nagrath I.J., ‘Power System Engineering’, Tata McGraw– Hill Education,
Second Edition, Reprint 2018.
2. Hadi Saadat, ‘Power System Analysis’, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 23rd
reprint, 2015.
3. Kundur P., ‘Power System Stability and Control, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
12th reprint, 2015.
4. B.M. Weedy, B.J. Cory et al, ‘Electric Power systems’, Wiley, Fifth Edition, 2012.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 - 1 - 2 - 2 - 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 - 1 - 2 - 2 - 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 - 1 - 2 - 2 - 2 3 1 2.33
CO5 2 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - 2 3 3 3
Avg. 2 1.6 1 1 - 1 - 1.6 - 2 - 2 3 2.2 2.86

59
 TIEE3611 POWER ELECTRONICS LABORATORY LTPC
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the VI characteristics of SCR, TRIAC, MOSFET and IGBT.
 To analyze the performance of semi converter, full converter, step up, step down choppers by
simulation and experimentation.
 To study the behavior of voltage waveforms of PWM inverter applying various modulation
techniques.
 To design and analyze the performance of SMPS.
 To study the performance of AC voltage controller by simulation and Experimentation.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Characteristics of SCR and TRIAC.
2. Characteristics of MOSFET and IGBT.
3. AC to DC half controlled converter.
4. AC to DC fully controlled converter.
5. Step down and step up MOSFET based choppers.
6. IGBT based single phase PWM inverter.
7. IGBT based three phase PWM inverter.
8. AC Voltage controller.
9. Switched mode power converter.
10. Simulation of PE circuits (1Φ & 3Φ semi converter, 1Φ & 3Φ full converter, dc-dc
converters, ac voltage controllers).
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Determine the characteristics of SCR, IGBT, TRIAC, MOSFET and IGBT
CO2: Find the transfer characteristics of full converter, semi converter, step up and step down
choppers by simulation experimentation.
CO3: Analyze the voltage waveforms for PWM inverter using various modulation techniques.
CO4: Design and experimentally verify the performance of basic DC/DC converter topologies
used for SMPS.
CO5: Understand the performance of AC voltage controllers by simulation and experimentation

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1.5 - - - 3 3 3 3

60
TIEE3701 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Various types of over voltages in power system and protection methods.
 Generation of over voltages in laboratories.
 Measurement of over voltages.
 Nature of Breakdown mechanism in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics.
 Testing of power apparatus and insulation coordination.

UNIT I OVER VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 9

Causes of over voltages and its effects on power system – Lightning, switching surges and temporary
over voltages – Reflection and Refraction of Travelling waves- protection against over voltages_
Insulation Coordination.

UNIT II DIELECTRIC BREAKDOWN 9

Properties of Dielectric materials - Gaseous breakdown in uniform and non-uniform fields –Corona
discharges – Vacuum breakdown – Conduction and breakdown in pure and commercial liquids,
Maintenance of oil Quality – Breakdown mechanisms in solid and composite dielectrics- Applications
of insulating materials in electrical equipment.

UNIT III GENERATION AND MEASUREMENTS OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH

CURRENTS 9
Generation of High DC, AC, impulse voltages and currents - Analysis of DC/AC and Impulse generator
circuits - Tripping and control of impulse generators, Measurement of High voltages and High currents
– High Resistance with series ammeter – Dividers - Resistance, Capacitance and Mixed dividers -
Peak Voltmeter, Generating Voltmeters, Electrostatic Voltmeters – Sphere Gaps, High current shunts-
Digital techniques in high voltage measurement.

UNIT IV HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING & INSULATION COORDINATION 9

High voltage testing of electrical power apparatus- International and Indian standards – Power
frequency, impulse voltage and DC testing of Insulators, circuit breakers, bushing, isolators and
transformers - Insulation Coordination.

UNIT V APPLICATION IN INDUSTRY 9

Introduction – electrostatic applications- electrostatic precipitation, separation, painting / coating,
spraying, imaging, printing, Transport of materials – manufacturing of sand paper – Smoke particle
detector – Electrostatic spinning, pumping, propulsion – Ozone generation – Biomedical applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Explain various overvoltage’s and its effects on power systems.
CO2: Understand the breakdown phenomena in different medium under uniform and non-
uniform fields.

61
CO3: Explain the methodsof generating and measuring High DC, AC, Impulse voltage and
currents.
CO4: Suggest and Conduct suitable HV testing of Electrical power apparatus as per Standards
CO5: Explain the Industrial Applications of Electrostatic Fields.

TEXT BOOKS
1. M.S.Naidu and V. Kamaraju, ‘High Voltage Engineering’, Tata McGraw Hill, Fifth
Edition, 2013.
2. E. Kuffel and W.S. Zaengl, J.Kuffel, ‘High voltage Engineering fundamentals’,
Newnes Second Edition, Elsevier , New Delhi, 2005.
3. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘High voltage Engineering’, New Age International Publishers, Fourth
Edition, 2020.
REFERENCES
1. L.L.Alston, High Voltage Technology, Oxford University Press, First Indian Edition 2006.
2. C.L.Wadhwa, High voltage Engineering, New Age International Publishers, Fourth Edition,
2020
3. Mazen Abdel – Salam, Hussein Anis, Ahdab A-Morshedy, RoshdayRadwan, High Voltage
Engineering – Theory &Practice,Second Edition, Taylor & Francis Gourp, 2019
4. Subir Ray.” An Introduction to High Voltage Engineering “PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi,
Second Edition-2011

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 2 -
CO2 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO3 2 2 3 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3 2 -
CO4 1 2 3 1 - - - 1 1 - 3 3 2 -
CO5 2 2 1 - - 2 - - - - 2 - 3 2
Avg. 2 2 2.33 1 - 2 - 1 1 - 2 3 3 2 2

62
TIEE3702 UTILIZATION AND CONSERVATION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know various electric drives and traction motors with applications
 To introduce the energy saving concept by different ways of illumination.
 To understand the different methods of electric heating and electric welding.
 To know the conversion of solar and wind energies into electrical energy for different
applications.
 To study the domestic utilization of electrical energy.

UNIT I ELECTRIC DRIVES AND TRACTION (7+2 Skill) 9

Fundamentals of electric drive - choice of an electric motor - application of motors for particular
services traction generator set, traction motors, power transformers - characteristic features of traction
motor - systems of railway electrification - electric braking - train movement and energy consumption -
traction motor control - track equipment and collection gear.
UNIT II ILLUMINATION (7+2 Skill) 9
Introduction - definition and meaning of terms used in illumination engineering - classification of light
sources - incandescent lamps, sodium vapour lamps, mercury vapour lamps, fluorescent lamps –
design of illumination systems - indoor lighting schemes - factory lighting halls - outdoor lighting
schemes - flood lighting - street lighting - energy saving lamps, LED
UNIT III HEATING AND WELDING (7+2 Skill) 9
Introduction - advantages of electric heating – modes of heat transfer - methods of electric heating -
resistance heating - arc furnaces - induction heating - dielectric heating - electric welding – types -
resistance welding - arc welding - power supply for arc welding - radiation welding.
Unit IV ENERGY CONSERVATION AND ITS IMPORTANCE (7+2 Skill) 9
Energy conservation act 2001 and its Features-Review of Industrial Energy Conservation-Energy
conservation in electrical Industries-Simulation study of energy conservation using power factor
controller. (Three phase circuit simulation with and without capacitor)
UNIT V DOMESTIC UTILIZATION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY (7+2 Skill) 9
House wiring - working principle of air conditioning system, Induction based appliances, Online and
OFF line UPS, Batteries - Power quality aspects – nonlinear and domestic loads – Earthing system
for Domestic, Industrial and Substation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation/Quiz/Surprise Test/Solving Problems) 10
1. Choosing electrical motors for drives and traction applications.
2. A general design procedure for lighting schemes.
3. Design of heating element and study of welding methods.
4. Practical case studies of energy conservation.
5. Power requirement for different domestic appliances.

63
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should have the:
CO1 Ability to choose suitable electric drives for different applications
CO2 Ability to design the illumination systems for energy saving
CO3 Ability to demonstrate the utilization of electrical energy for heating and welding purposes
CO4 Ability to know the effective usage of solar and wind energies for electrical applications
CO5 Ability to do electric connection for any domestic appliance like refrigerator, battery
charging circuit for a specific household application.
CO6 To illustrate the need for energy conservation and to simulate three phase power
control.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. N.V. Suryanarayana, “Utilisation of Electric Power”, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Age
International Limited, 1994 & Second Edition 2017 Feb.
2. J.B.Gupta, “Utilisation Electric power and Electric Traction”, S.K.Kataria and sons, 2000,
2012th Edition, 2013, January.
3. G.D.Rai,”Non-Conventional Energy sources”,Khanna publications Ltd.,New Delhi 1998
4. D.P.Kothari, K.C.Singal, Rakesh Ranjan, “Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging
Technologies”, PHI Learing Private Limited, 3rd Edition 2022.
5. Industrial Energy Conservation, Volume I-II, S C Bhatia, Sarvesh Devraj, Energy
conservation and Managment by Akshay A pujara1st edition, June 2018.

REFERENCES:
1. R.K.Rajput, Utilisation of Electric Power, Laxmi publications 2nd Edition 2016.
2. H.Partab, Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, Edition, Dhanpat Rai and Co.,
New Delhi-2004.
3. C.L.Wadhwa, “Generation, Distribution and Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, New Age
international Pvt.Ltd., 3rd Edition, 2015 January.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03

CO1 3 3 2 1 - 1 - 1.5 - - - - 3 - -
CO2 2 1 3 - - - - 1.5 - - - - 3 - -
CO3 3 2 2 - - 1 - 1.5 - - - - 3 - -
CO4 1 2 3 - - - - 1.5 - - - - 3 - -
CO5 1 1 3 - - 1 - 1.5 - - - - 3 3 2
CO6 3 3 3 - - - - 1.5 - - - - 3 3 3
Avg 2.2 2 2.6 1 - 1 - 1.5 - - - - 3 3 2.5

64
TIEE3703 ELECTRIC VEHICLE ARCHITECTURE L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

 To learn the structure of Electric Vehicle, Hybrid Electric Vehicle

 To study about the EV conversion components
 To know about the details and specifications for Electric Vehicles
 To understand the concepts of Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicle
 To model and simulate all types of DC motors

UNIT I VEHICLE ARCHITECTURE and SIZING (7+2 Skill) 9

Electric Vehicle History, and Evolution of Electric Vehicles. Series, Parallel and Series parallel
Architecture, Micro and Mild architectures. Mountain Bike - Motorcycle- Electric Cars and Heavy Duty
EVs. -Details and Specifications.

UNIT II VEHICLE MECHANICS (7+2 Skill) 9

Vehicle mechanics- Roadway fundamentals, Laws of motion, Vehicle Kinetics, Dynamics of vehicle
motion, propulsion power, velocity and acceleration, Tire –Road mechanics, Propulsion System
Design.
UNIT III POWER COMPONENTS AND BRAKES (7+2 Skill) 9
Power train Component sizing- Gears, Clutches, Differential, Transmission and Vehicle Brakes. EV
power train sizing, HEV Powertrain sizing, Example.
UNIT IV HYBRID VEHICLE CONTROL STRATEGY (7+2 Skill) 9
Vehicle supervisory controll, Mode selection strategy, Modal Control strategies.
UNIT V PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (7+2 Skill) 9
Introduction-History-Comparison with electrical and hybrid electrical vehicle-Construction and working
of PHEV-Block diagram and components-Charging mechanisms-Advantages of PHEVs.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / etc) Basics of MATLAB simulation 10
1. Variables and Expressions Formats, Vectors and Matrices,
2. Arrays, Vectors,
3. Matrices, Built-in functions, Trigonometric functions,
4. Data types and Plotting.
5. Simulation of drive cycles.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Summarize the History and Evolution of EVs, Hybrid and Plug-In Hybrid EVs
CO2: Describe the various EV components
CO3: Describe the concepts related in the Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicles
CO4: Analyse the details and Specifications for the various EVs developed.
CO5: Describe the hybrid vehicle control strategy.

65
REFERENCES:
1. Mehrdad Ehsani, YiminGao, Sebastian E. Gay, Ali Emadi, 'Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and
Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and Design', CRC Press, 2004.
2. Build Your Own Electric Vehicle,Seth Leitman , Bob Brant, McGraw Hill, Third Edition 2013.
3. Advanced Electric Drive Vehicles, Ali Emadi, CRC Press, First edition 2017.
4. The Electric Vehicle Conversion Handbook: How to Convert Cars, Trucks, Motorcycles, and
Bicycles -- Includes EV Components, Kits, and Project Vehicles Mark Warner, HP Books,
2011.
5. Heavy-duty Electric Vehicles from Concept to Reality, Shashank Arora, Alireza Tashakori
Abkenar, Shantha Gamini Jayasinghe, Kari Tammi, Elsevier Science, 2021
6. Electric Vehicles Modern Technologies and Trends, Nil Patel, Akash Kumar Bhoi,
Sanjeevikumar Padmanaban, Jens Bo Holm-Nielsen Springer, 2020
7. Hybrid Electric Vehicles: A Review of Existing Configurations and Thermodynamic Cycles,
Rogelio León , Christian Montaleza , José Luis Maldonado , Marcos Tostado-Véliz and
Francisco Jurado, Thermo, 2021, 1, 134–150. https://doi.org/10.3390/thermo1020010.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - 2 3 - -
CO2 3 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - 2 3 - -
CO4 3 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - 2 3 - -
CO5 3 - 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 - 2.2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 3

66
 TIEE3811 PROJECT WORK L T P C
0 0 6 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The student should be made to learn methodology to select a good project and able to work in a team
leading to development of hardware/software product.prepare a good technical report. Gain Motivation
to present the ideas behind the project with clarity.

A Project topic must be selected either from research literature or the students themselves may propose
suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The aim of the project work is to deepen
Comprehension of principles by applying them to a new problem which may be the design /fabrication of
any power component / circuit / sensor / Activator / Controller, a research investigation, a computer or
management project or a design problem. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a minimum
of two reviews. The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A project
report is required at the end of the semester. The project work is evaluated jointly by external and
internal examiners constituted by the Head of the Department based on oral presentation and the
project report.

TOTAL : 90 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Ability to identify, formulate, design, interprete,analyze and provide solutions to complex
engineering and societal issues by applying knowledge gained on basics of science and
Enginnering.
CO2 Ability to choose, conduct and demonstrate a sound technical knowledge of their selected
project topics in the field of power components, protection, highvoltage, electronics, process
automation, power electronics and drives instrumentation and control by exploring suitable
engineering and IT tools.
CO3 Ability to understand, formulate and propose new learning algorithms to solve engineering
and societal problems of moderate complexity through multidisciplinary projectsunderstanding
commitment towards sustainable development.
CO4 Ability to demonstrate, prepare reports, communicate and work in a team as a
member/leader by adhering to ethical responsibilities.
CO5 Ability to acknowledge the value of continuing education for oneself and to stay up with
technology advancements.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3 3
CO2 - - - - 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - -
CO3 - - - - - - 3 - 3 - - - - - 3
CO4 - - - - - - - 3 3 3 3 - - - 3
CO5 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 3 3 3
AVg. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

67
 POWER ENGINEERING

TIEE3001 UNDERGROUND CABLE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge on the following topics

 Understanding Power Cable Characteristics and Applications.
 Cable Manufacturing.
 Installation of underground power cables
 Underground cable System Fault Locating.
 Testing and maintenance of Underground cable system.
 Cable Performance and Field Assessment of Power Cables

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES (7+2 SKILL) 9

Development of Underground Cables - Electric Lighting- Distribution of Energy for
Lighting- - Paper Insulated Cables - Underground Residential Distribution Systems-
Underground Residential Distribution Systems- Medium Voltage Cable Development.

UNIT II CABLE ARCHITECHTURE, DIELECTRIC THEORY AND CABLE 9

CHARACTERISTICS (7+2 SKILL)
Architecture of Underground Cabling System - Basic Dielectric Theory of Cable –
Conductors -Armour and Protective Finishes - Cable Characteristics: Electrical-
Fundamentals of Electrical Insulation Materials - Electrical Properties of Cable Insulating
Materials - Cable Standards and Quality Assurance - Cable design parameters- Current
Carrying Capacity - Short-circuit Ratings.

UNIT III SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND CABLES(7+2 SKILL) 9

Supply Distribution Systems - Distribution Cable Types, Design and Applications - Paper
Insulated Distribution Cables - PVC Insulated Cables - Polymeric Insulated Distribution
Cables for 6-30 kV - Manufacture of Distribution Cables - Joints and Terminations for
Distribution Cables - Testing of Distribution Cables.
.
UNIT IV TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS AND CABLES(7+2 SKILL) 9
Basic Cable Types for A.C. Transmission - Self-contained Fluid-filled Cables - Gas
Pressure Cables - High Pressure Fluid-filled Pipe Cables - Polymeric Insulated Cables for
Transmission Voltages - Techniques for Increasing Current Carrying Capacity -
Transmission Cable Accessories and Jointing for Pressure-assisted and Polymeric
Cables.

UNIT V CABLE INSTALLATION, TESTING, MAINTENANCE(7+2 SKILL) 9

Installation of Transmission Cables -Splicing, Terminating, and Accessories - Sheath
Bonding and Grounding-Testing of Transmission Cable Systems - Underground System
Fault Locating - Field Assessment of Power Cable Systems- Condition monitoring tests –
PD measurements.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

68
 SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (GROUP SEMINAR/ MINI PROJECT/ ASSIGNMENT/ CONTENT
PREPARATION/ QUIZ/ SURPRISE TEST /SOLVING GATE QUESTIONS /ETC. 10
1. Demonstration of cable architecture with cable samples of all types.
2. Understanding the cable manufacturing process through factory visit.
3. Familiarization of the cable laying procedure through field visits.
4. Familiarization of cable jointing / end termination techniques.
5. Understanding and familiarization of cable fault locating techniques
through field visit to local distribution company or inhouse laboratory.
6. Understanding testing procedures and condition monitoring tests.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Ability to understand the fundamental of underground cable system.
CO2 Ability to gain knowledge on the architecture of UG cable and physical and electrical
characteristics of the UG cable.
CO3 Ability to understand different types of cable used in distribution system.
CO4 Ability to acquire knowledge on Underground cables used in transmission system
CO5 Ability to understand the cable installations procedures and practices.
CO6 Ability to understand the theory / methodology of cable fault detection and
rectification, testing and maintenance.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. William Thue, ‘Electrical Power Cable Engineering’, CRC Press Taylor & Francis
Group., 6000 Broken Sound Parkway NW, Suite 300Boca Raton, FL 33487-2742,
3rd Edition 2017.
2. G. F. Moore, ‘Electric Cables Handbook’ -Third edition, Blackwell Science Ltd,
9600 Garsington Road, Oxford OX4 2DQ, UK., January 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Leonard L. Grigsby, ‘Electrical Power Cable Engineering’ - CRC Press, Marcel Dekker, 3 rd
Edition 2012.
2. Christian Flytkjaer Jensen, Online Location of Faults on AC Cables in Underground
Transmission Systems (Springer Theses), 2014, March.
3. https://kafactor.com/content/technical-resources/kerite-underground-cable-engineering-
handbook.pdf
4. Handbook on Cable Fault Localization (April 2020)
https://rdso.indianrailways.gov.in/works/uploads/File/Handbook%20on%20Cable%20Fault%2
0Localization(2).pdf
5. K. H. Ali et al.: Industry Practice Guide for Underground Cable Fault-Finding in the LVDN:
https://ieeexplore.ieee.org/stamp/stamp.jsp?arnumber=9807279, June 2022.
6. R. W. Deltenre, J. J. Schwarz, and H. J. Wagnon, ‘‘Underground cable fault location: A
handbook to TD-153,’’ BDM Corp., Albuquerque, NM, USA, Final Rep. EPRI EL-363, 1977.
[Online]. Available: https://www.osti.gov/servlets/purl/7233049, doi: 10.2172/7233049,
January 1997.

69
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs
COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 - - - - 2 1 - 3 2 - 3 - 3
CO2 3 2 - - - - 2 1 - 3 2 - 3 - 3
CO3 3 2 - - - - 2 1 - 3 2 - 3 - 3
CO4 3 2 - - - - 2 1 - 3 2 - 3 - 3
CO5 3 2 3 - - - 2 1 - 3 2 - 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 - 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2 - 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.1 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 2 - 3 3 3

TIEE3002 SUBSTATION ENGINEERING AND LTPC

AUTOMATION 3003

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To help engineering students to have a holistic understanding of the concepts behind
substation engineering and design.
 The course aims to give an exposure to the students to the requirements of practical
aspects including an overview of civil and mechanical aspects.
 Course aims to enhance the knowledge, and give the practical guidelines for site
selection,construction, protection along with maintenance, safety in a substation.
 It also aims at providing knowledge about state-of-the-art technology in substation
automation system

UNIT I SUBSTATION DESIGN DEVELOPMENT (7+2 SKILL) 9

Substation Introduction and Classifications, Different bus bar switching schemes for Substation.
Standards and Practices, Factors Influencing Substation Design - Altitude, Ambient Temperature,
Earthquake and seismic zones, pollution and corrosion etc., Testing of Electrical Equipment, Concept
and development of Single Line Diagram. Requirement of substation calculation.

UNIT II SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT (7+2 SKILL) 9

Selection and sizing of main substation equipment: Transformer, Isolator, Circuit Breaker, surge
arrestor, Instrument transformers, classification of equipment with a practical overview, and the
performance parameters. Classifications of MV Switchgear and Key Design Parameters, MV/LV
Switchgear construction and design of control scheme. Station Auxiliary equipment: Diesel Generator
System, Basics of AC/DC Auxiliary Power System & Sizing of Aux. Transformer, DC System
Components, Battery Sizing & charger Sizing, DG Set Classification, and sizing. Introduction to gas
insulated substation: Operating principle of GIS, Advantage over AIS, construction of GIS.

UNIT III PROTECTION AND SUBSTATION AUTOMATION (7+2 SKILL) 9

Power System protection, Overcurrent and Earth Fault protection and coordination. Distribution
Feeder Protection, Transformer – Unit/Main Protection, Familiarization of NUMERICAL Relays,
distance/differential protection for transmission line. Substation Automation: Evolution of Substation
Automation, Communication System Fundamentals-Protocol fundamental and choosing the right
protocol. Substation integration and automation functional architecture, Substation signal list - DI, DO,
AI, AO– Bay Control Unit (BCU), Remote Terminal Unit RTU.

70
UNIT IV SUBSTATION DESIGN & LAYOUT ENGINEERING (7+2 SKILL) 9
Layout aspects of Outdoor Air Insulated Substation and GIS: Statutory Clearances, Equipment Layout
engineering aspects for Outdoor Substation/GIS and related calculations, and guide lines, Cable
routing layout, Erection Key Diagram (EKD), switchyard earthing design as per IEEE80, Importance
and Types of Earthing, Earthing Design, Types of Earthing Material, Direct stroke Lightning Protection
for switchyard with IS/ IEC 62305. LV Cables - Power & Control, MV Cables, Methods for Cable
Installation, Practical aspects of Cable Sizing, Cable accessories, Illumination System Design.

UNIT V INTERFACE ENGINEERING (7+2 SKILL) 9

Civil & Structural Engineering - Familiarization of site development plan, equipment supports
structures, foundation for equipment, familiarization of control building and substation building,
infrastructure development, Mechanical System- Fire Detection, Alarm System and Fire Suppression
System for transformer, Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning (HVAC) for Substation.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (GROUP SEMINAR/ MINI PROJECT/ ASSIGNMENT/ CONTENT

PREPARATION/ QUIZ/ SURPRISE TEST /SOLVING GATE QUESTIONS /ETC. 10

1.Battery sizing for a substation with a load cycle based on IEEE 1115 Ni-cd - A case study
OR
2.DG and auxiliary transformer sizing for a substation auxiliary power supply- A case study
3.Overcurrent Relay coordination in a substation- A case study
4.Earthmat sizing calculation for an outdoor substation based on IEEE80- A case study
OR
5.Direct stroke lightning protection calculation for outdoor switchyard based on IEC 62305- A
case study
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of the course student will be able to:
CO 1: Understand the key deciding factors involved in substation design and operation
CO 2: Know about the sizing and selection of equipment which forms part of substation
CO 3: Know about composite layout design aspects of the substation with different services
and the challenges including statutory clearances.
CO 4: Understand about Interdisciplinary aspects involved in substation design
CO 5: Understand different protection and control scheme involved in substation design
CO 6: Know about substation automation system and different communication protocol
involved for efficient operation of a substation

REFERENCES:
1. McDonald John D, “Electric Power Substations Engineering”, CRC Press, 3 rd Edition, 2012
2. Partap Singh Satnam, P.V. Gupta, “Sub-station Design and Equipment”, Dhanpat Rai
Publications, 1st Edition, 2013
3. Sunil S. Rao, “Switchgear Protection and Power Systems (Theory, Practice & Solved
Problems)”, Khanna Publications, 14th Edition, 2019 .
4. Electrical substation and engineering & practice by S.Rao, 3 rd Edition, Khanna Publishers
2015
6. Manual on Substation by Central Board of irrigation and Power (CBIP) Publication No 342.,
2006.
7. Substation automation system Design and implementation by Evelio Padilla by Wiley
Publications, 1st Edition, 2015 November.

71
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs
COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 1 3 2 - 2 1 3 2 - - - 3 3 - 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 3 - 1 2 - - 2 3 - 1
CO3 3 2 3 3 1 3 - 2 2 - - 3 3 - 1
CO4 3 1 2 - - 3 2 1 2 - - 2 3 - 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - 3 2 1 1 - - 3 3 - 1
CO6 - 2 3 3 - 3 - 1 - - - 3 3 - 1
Avg 2.6 2.3 2.6 3 1.6 2.6 2.3 1.3 1.75 - - 2.6 3 - 1

TIEE3003 HVDC AND FACTS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand:
• The problems in AC transmission systems and DC transmission systems
• The operation and control of SVC and TCSC
• The concepts of IGBT based FACTS controllers
• The basic operation Line Commutated Converter(LCC) based HVDC links
• The features of voltage source converter based HVDC link..

UNIT I INTRODUCTION (7+2 Skill) 9

Reactive power control in electrical power transmission lines–load & system compensation,
Uncompensated transmission line–shunt and series compensation. Need for HVDC Transmission,
Comparison between AC & DC Transmission, , Types of HVDC transmission System.

UNIT II STATIC VAR COMPENSATOR (SVC) AND THYRISTOR

CONTROLLED SERIES COMPENSATOR (TCSC) (7+2 Skill) 9
VI characteristics of FC+TSR, TSC+TSR, Voltage control by SVC–Advantages of slope in
dynamic characteristics–Influence of SVC on system voltage–Design of SVC voltage regulator,
Thyristor Controlled Series Compensator (TCSC), Concept of TCSC, Operation of the TCSC–
Different modes of operation, Applications:

UNIT III VOLTAGE SOURCE CONVERTER BASED FACTS CONTROLLERS (7+2 Skill) 9
Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM)–Principle of operation–V-I Characteristics.
Applications: Steady state power transfer-enhancement of transient stability-prevention of voltage
instability. SSSC-operation of SSSC VI characteristics, Enhancement in Power transfer capability –,
UPSC – Operation Principle Applications.

UNIT IV LINE COMMUTATED HVDC TRASMISSION (7+2 Skill) 9

Operation of Gratz bridge - Effect of delay in Firing Angle – Effect of commutation overlap -
Equivalent circuit,. Basic concept of HVDC transmission. Model of operations and control of power
flow CC and CIA mode of operation

UNIT V VSC BASED HVDC TRANSMISSION (7+2 Skill) 9

Basic 2 level IGBT inverter operation- 4 Quadrant operation- phase angle control- dq
control- Control of power flow in VSC based HVDC Transmission, Topologies of MTDC system.
72
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 10

1. Simulation of FC+TSR connected to IEEE 5 bus system

2. Realization of reactive power, support by SVC in open loop and closed loop control in
simulation.
3. Regulation of line flows employing TCSC and TSSC in closed loop control in
simulation
4. Simulation of two terminal HVDC Link, closed loop control in CC and CIA mode in simulation
5. Realization of four quadrant operation of VSC in open loop mode in simulation

COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion the above subject, students will be able to understand
CO1: To Identify and understand the problems in AC transmission systems and understand the
need for Flexible AC transmission systems and HVDC Transmission
CO2: To understand the operation and control of SVC and TCSC and its applications to enhance
the stability and damping.
CO3: To Analyze basic operation and control of voltage source converter based FACTS
controllers
CO4: To demonstrate basic operation and control of Line Commutated HVDC Transmission
CO5: To explain the d-q control based operation of VSC based HVDC Transmission

TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Mohan Mathur, Rajiv K.Varma ,“Thyristor–Based Facts Controllers for Electrical
Transmission Systems”, IEEE press andJohnWiley&Sons,Inc,2002.
2. Narain G.Hingorani, “Understanding FACTS-Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC
Transmission Systems”, Standard Publishers Distributors,Delhi-110006,2011.
REFERENCES:

1. K.R.Padiyar,”FACTS Controllersin Power Transmission and Distribution”, New Age

International (P) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi, 2008
2. A.T.John,“FlexibleA.C.TransmissionSystems”,InstitutionofElectricalandElectronic
Engineers(IEEE), 1999.
3. V.K.Sood, HVDC and FACTS controllers–Applications of Static Converters in Power System,
APRIL2004,KluwerAcademic Publishers,2004.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 3 1 3 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO2 2 3 1 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO3 2 3 1 3 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 1 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 1 3 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
Avg 2.6 3 1 2.6 1.8 - - - - - - - 2 3 3

73
TIEE3004 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDITING LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the concepts behind economic analysis and Load management.
 To understand the basics of materials and energy balance.
 To analyze the energy efficiency in thermal utilities.
 To know the concept of compressed air system.
 To illustrate the concept of lighting systems and cogeneration.

UNIT I GENERAL ASPECTS OF ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND ENERGY

AUDIT (7+2 Skill) 9

Commercial and Non-commercial energy - final energy consumption - energy needs of growing
economy - energy pricing - energy conservation and its importance - Re-structuring of the energy
supply sector - Energy Conservation Act 2001, Energy Conservation (Amendment) Act, 2010, and
its features - electricity tariff - Thermal Basics - need and types of energy audit - Energy
management/audit approach- understanding energy costs - maximizing system efficiencies -
optimizing the input energy requirements - energy audit instruments - Case study.

UNIT II MATERIAL AND ENERGY BALANCE (7+2 Skill) 9

Methods for preparing process flow - material and energy balance diagrams - Energy policy
purpose - location of energy management - roles and responsibilities of energy manager –
employees training and planning- Financial Management: financial analysis techniques, simple
payback period, return on investment, net present value, internal rate of return – Case Study.

UNIT III ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL UTILITIES (7+2 Skill) 9

Introduction to fuels - properties of fuel oil, coal and gas - principles of combustion - combustion of
oil, coal and gas - Boilers: Types, combustion in boilers, performances evaluation, analysis of
losses - energy conservation opportunities - FBC boilers - Steam System: Properties of steam,
assessment of steam distribution losses, steam leakages, steam trapping, condensate and flash
steam recovery system, identifying opportunities for energy savings - Furnaces: Classification,
general fuel economy measures in furnaces, excess air, heat distribution, temperature control,
draft control, waste heat recovery – Refractory : types, selection and application of refractories,
heat loss - Cogeneration: classification and saving potentials - Case Study.

UNIT IV ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM (7+2 Skill) 9

Compressed Air System: Types of air compressors - efficient compressor operation - Compressed
air system components - leakage test - savings opportunities - Refrigeration System: Vapour
compression refrigeration cycle – refrigerants - coefficient of performance - factors affecting
Refrigeration and Air conditioning system - savings opportunities - Vapour absorption refrigeration
system: working principle - types and comparison with vapour compression system - saving
potential - Cooling Tower: Types and performance evaluation, efficient system operation - flow
control strategies and energy saving - Diesel Generating system: Factors affecting selection -
energy performance assessment of diesel conservation avenues - Case Study.

74
UNIT V ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES (7+2 Skill) 9
Electrical load management and maximum demand control - power factor improvement and its
benefit - selection and location of capacitors - performance assessment of PF capacitors -
automatic power factor controllers - transformer losses - Electric motors: Types - losses in
induction motors - motor efficiency - factors affecting motor performance - rewinding and motor
replacement issues - energy saving opportunities with energy efficient motors - soft starters with
energy saver - variable speed drives – Fans and blowers: Types - efficient system operation - flow
control strategies -Pumps and Pumping System: Types - system operation - flow control methods -
Lighting System: Light source, choice of lighting, luminance requirements – ballast - occupancy
sensors - energy efficient lighting controls - energy conservation avenues - Case Study.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 10
1. Study of energy conservation and audit
2. Performance study of Electric Motors.
3. Analysis on fan characteristic curves at different operating points
4. Case study of illumination system
5. Performance analysis of Compressors
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1 Students able to acquire knowledge in the field of energy management and auditing
process.
CO2 Learned the about basic concepts of economic analysis and load management.

CO3 Able to design the effective thermal utility system.

CO4 Able to improve the efficiency in compressed air system.
CO5 Acquired the design concepts in the field of lighting systems, light sources and various
forms of cogeneration.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Mehmet Kanoglu, Yunus A Cengel, "Energy Efficiency and Management for
Engineers", McGraw-Hill Education, First Edition, 2020.
REFERENCES:
1. Moncef Krati, ‘Energy Audit of Building Systems: An Engineering Approach’, Third Edition,
CRC Press, Dec.2020.
2. Sonal Desai, ‘Handbook of Energy Audit’, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited,
2015.
3. Michael P.Deru, Jim Kelsey, ‘Procedures for Commercial Building Energy Audits’,
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air conditioning Engineers, 2011.
4. Thomas D.Eastop, ‘Energy Efficiency: For Engineers and Technologists’, Longman
Scientific & Technical, 1990, 1st Edition.
5. ‘Energy Managers and Energy Auditors Guide book’, Bureau of Energy Efficiency, 2006.
6. Larry C. Witte, Philip S.Schmidt, David R.Brown, ‘Industrial Energy Management and
Utilization’, Springer Berlin Heidelberg, 1988.

75
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1. http://lab.fs.uni-lj.si/kes/erasmus/Energy%20Management%20Handbook.pdf
2. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2212827114004491
3. https://mppolytechnic.ac.in/mp-staff/notes_upload_photo/
CS595EnergyEfficiencyinElectricalUtilities-5391.pdf
4. http://knowledgeplatform.in/wp-content/uploads/2017/03/1.3-Energy-management-Audit.pdf

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 - 2 - - - 1 - - 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 - - - - - 2 1 3 - 1 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 - 1 2 3 - - 1 - - 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 - - - - - 1 3 - - 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 - 1 2 - - - 1 - 2 2 3 2 3
Avg 3 2.5 1 2 3 - 2 1 3 - 1.5 2 3 2 3

TIEE3005 POWER QUALITY LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basic definitions in Power Quality.
 To study the power quality issues in Single Phase and Three Phase Systems.
 To understand the principles of Power System Harmonics.
 To know the way to use DSTATCOM for Harmonic Mitigation.
 To learn the concepts related with Series Compensation.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION (7+2 Skill) 9

Introduction – Characterization of Electric Power Quality: Transients, short duration and long duration
voltage variations, Voltage imbalance, waveform distortion, Voltage fluctuations, Power frequency
variation, Power acceptability curves – power quality problems: poor load power factor, Non-linear
and unbalanced loads, DC offset in loads, Notching in load voltage, Disturbance in supply voltage –
Power quality standards.

76
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE SYSTEM (7+2 Skill) 9

Single phase linear and non-linear loads – single phase sinusoidal, non-sinusoidal source –
supplying linear and nonlinear loads – three phase balanced system – three phase unbalanced
system – three phase unbalanced and distorted source supplying non-linear loads – concept of
power factor – three phase- three wire – three phase - four wire system.

UNIT III MITIGATION OF POWER SYSTEM HARMONICS (7+2 Skill) 9

Introduction - Principle of Harmonic Filters – Series-Tuned Filters – Double Band-Pass Filters –

damped Filters – Detuned Filters – Active Filters – Power Converters – Harmonic Filter Design –
Tuned Filter – Second-Order Damped Filter – Impedance Plots for Filter Banks – Impedance Plots
for a Three-Branch 33 kV Filter.

UNIT IV LOAD COMPENSATION USING DSTATCOM (7+2 Skill) 9

Compensating single – phase loads – Ideal three phase shunt compensator structure – generating
reference currents using instantaneous PQ theory – Instantaneous symmetrical components theory –
Generating reference currents when the source is unbalanced –Realization and control of
DSTATCOM – DSTATCOM in Voltage control mode.

UNIT V SERIES COMPENSATION OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (7+2 Skill) 9

Rectifier supported DVR – DC Capacitor supported DVR – DVR Structure – Voltage Restoration –
Series Active Filter – Unified Power Quality Conditioner.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 10
1. Harmonic analysis of single phase power converters (Semi converters and Full
Converters) with R and RL load via simulation
2. Harmonic analysis of three phase power converters (Semi converters and Full
Converters) with R and RL load via simulation
3. Harmonic analysis of single phase inverters with R and RL load via simulation
4. Harmonic analysis of three phase inverters with R and RL load via simulation
5. Mitigation of Harmonics using Tuned Filter

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php
2. https://old.amu.ac.in/emp/studym/2442.pdf
3. https://electricalacademia.com/electric-power
4. https://www.intechopen.com/books/6214
5. https://www.cde.com/resources/technical-papers/Mitigation-of-Harmonics.pdf
6. https://www.academia.edu/43237017/Use_Series_Compensation_in_Distribution_
Networks_33_KV

77
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1 Use various definitions of power quality for power quality issues

CO2 Describe the concepts related with single phase / three phase, linear / nonlinear loads and
single phase / three phase sinusoidal, non-sinusoidal source
CO3 Solve problems related with mitigation of Power System Harmonics
CO4 Use DSTATCOM for load compensation
CO5 Demonstrate the role of DVR, SAFs UPQC in power distribution systems

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Arindam Ghosh and Gerad Ledwich “Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power
Devices”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, First Edition,2002
2. G.T.Heydt, “Electric Power Quality”, Stars in a Circle Publications, Second Edition, 2011.
3. George J. Wakileh, “Power System Harmonics – Fundamentals, Analysis and Filter Design”,
Springer – Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, New York, 2019.

REFERENCES:

1. R.C.Duggan “Electric Power Systems Quality”, Tata MC Graw Hill Publishers, Third
Edition, 2012.
2. Arrillga “Power System Harmonics”, John Wiely and Sons, 2003 2 nd Edition.
3. Derek A.Paice “Power Electronic Converter Harmonics” IEEE Press, 1995, Wiley – IEE Press
1999, 18th Edition.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 3

78
 TIEE3006 SMART GRID LT P C
3003

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the evolution of Smart and Interconnected energy systems.
 To understand the various challenges and benefits of smart grid and the national and
international initiatives taken
 To understand the concepts related with transmission and distribution in smart grid technologies.
 To get an insight of the various smart measurement technologies.
 To understand the various computing technologies for Smart Operation of the Grid.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION (7+2 SKILL) 9

Evolution of Energy Systems, Concept, Definitions and Need, Difference between Conventional & Smart
Grid, Drivers, structures, functions, opportunities, challenges and benefits of Smart Grid, Basics of Micro
grid, National and International Initiatives in Smart Grid.

UNIT II SMART METERING (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction to Advanced Metering infrastructure (AMI) - drivers and benefits, AMI protocols, standards
and initiatives, AMI needs in the smart grid, Real time management and control, Phasor Measurement
Unit (PMU).

UNIT III SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES (Transmission) (7+2 SKILL) 9

Technology Drivers, Smart energy resources, Smart substations, Substation Automation, Feeder
Automation, Transmission systems: EMS, Wide area Monitoring, Protection and control.

UNIT IV SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES (Distribution) (7+2 SKILL) 9

DMS, Volt/VAr control, Fault Detection, Isolation and service restoration, Outage management, High-
Efficiency Distribution Transformers, Phase Shifting Transformers, Electric Vehicles.

UNIT V HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING FOR SMART GRID APPLICATIONS (7+2 SKILL) 9
Local Area Network (LAN), House Area Network (HAN), Wide Area Network (WAN), Broadband over
Power line (BPL), IP based Protocols, Computing technologies for Smart Grid applications (Web Service
to CLOUD Computing), Role of big data and IoT, Cyber Security for Smart Grid.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 10
1. Assignment-Familiarization of National and International Initiatives in Smart Grid
2. Simulation of smart meter using (MATLAB/ ETAP/SCILAB/ LABVIEW/ Proteus/Equivalent open source
software).
3. Visit to a substation for analysing the Automation Technologies like Monitoring, Protection and control.
4. Awareness about High- Efficiency Distribution Transformers, Phase Shifting Transformers in a
substation.
5. Introduction to recent technologies in electric vehicles and understanding the operation of EV,HEV and
PHEV.
6. Simulation of IoT based digital communication system for smart grid applications.

79
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion the above subject, students will be able to understand
CO1: To be able to understand the importance and objectives of Power System Grid.
CO2: To be able to know and understand the concept of a smart grid;
CO3: To identify and discuss smart metering devices and associated technologies.
CO4: To be able to get an overview of Microgrid and Electric Vehicle Technology.
CO5:To be able to have an up to date knowledge on the various computing technologies; to
understand the role of Big Data and IoT for effective and efficient operation of Smart Grid.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Smart Grids Advanced Technologies and Solutions, Second Edition, Edited by
Stuart Borlase,CRC, 2018.
2. Janaka Ekanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama, “Smart Grid:
Technology and Applications”, John Wiley,2012
3. James Momoh ,Smart Grid Fundamentals of Design and Analysis, IEEE press 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. Ahmed F. Zobaa, Trevor J. Bihl, Big data analytics in future power systems, 1st Edition,
CRC press 2018.
2. C. Gungor et al., "Smart Grid Technologies: Communication Technologies and
Standards," in IEEE Transactions on Industrial Informatics, vol. 7, no. 4, pp. 529-539,
Nov. 2011.doi: 10.1109/TII.2011.2166794.
3. X. Fang, S. Misra, G. Xue and D. Yang, "Smart Grid — The New and Improved Power
Grid: A Survey," in IEEE Communications Surveys & Tutorials, vol. 14, no. 4, pp. 944-
980, Fourth Quarter 2012. doi: 10.1109/SURV.2011.101911.00087.
4. Stuart Borlase “Smart Grid : Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”, CRC Press 2012.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 -
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 -
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 -
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 -
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 -
Avg 3 3 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 -

80
TIEE3007 RESTRUCTURED POWER MARKET L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Students will be able to:
 Describe various types of deregulated markets in power system.
 Describe the technical and non-technical issues in deregulated power industry.
 Classify different market mechanisms and summarize the role of various entities in the
market.
 Analyze the energy and ancillary services management in deregulated power industry.
 Understand the restructuring framework US and Indian power sector

UNIT I INTRODUCTION (7+2 SKILL) 9

Reasons for restructuring - Understanding the restructuring process - objectives of deregulation of
various power systems across the world - Consumer behavior - Supplier behavior - Market
equilibrium - Short-run and Long-run costs - Various costs of production. The Philosophy of Market
Models: Market models based on contractual arrangements - Market architecture .

UNIT II TRANSMISSION CONGESTION MANAGEMENT (7+2 SKILL) 9

Importance of congestion management in deregulated environment - Classification of congestion
management methods - Calculation of ATC - Non-market methods - Market based methods -
Nodal pricing - Inter-zonal Intra-zonal congestion management - Price area congestion
management - Capacity alleviation method.

UNIT III LOCATIONAL MARGINAL PRICES(LMP) AND FINANCIAL TRANSMISSION

RIGHTS (7+2 SKILL) 9
Fundamentals of locational marginal pricing - Lossless DCOPF model for LMP calculation - Loss
compensated DCOPF model for LMP calculation - ACOPF model for LMP calculation - Risk
Hedging Functionality Of financial Transmission Rights - FTR issuance process - Treatment of
revenue shortfall - Secondary trading of FTRs - Flow Gate rights - FTR and market power.

UNIT IV ANCILLARY SERVICE MANAGEMENT AND PRICING OF TRANSMISSION

NETWORK (7+2 SKILL) 9
Types of ancillary services - Load-generation balancing related services - Voltage control and
reactive power support services - Black start capability service - Mandatory provision of ancillary
services - Markets for ancillary services - Co-optimization of energy and reserve services -
International comparison. Pricing of transmission network: wheeling - principles of transmission
pricing - transmission pricing methods - Marginal transmission pricing paradigm - Composite
pricing paradigm - loss allocation methods.

UNIT V MARKET EVOLUTION (7+2 SKILL) 9

US markets: PJM market - The Nordic power market - Reforms in Indian power sector: Framework
of Indian power sector - Reform initiatives - availability based tariff (ABT) - The Electricity Act 2012 -
Open Access issues - Power exchange.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / etc) 10

1. Analysis of ATC calculations using any one of the relevant software tool.
2. DCOPF based LMP calculations using any one of the relevant software tool.
3. ACOPF based LMP calculations using any one of the relevant software tool.
4. Analysis of social welfare maximization with different objectives.
81
 5. Analysis of ABT components.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to:
CO1: describe the requirement for deregulation of the electricity market and the philosophy of
various market models
CO2: analyze the various methods of congestion management in deregulated power system
CO3: analyze the locational marginal pricing and financial transmission rights
CO4: analyze the ancillary service management
CO5: analyze transmission pricing paradigm
CO6: understand the evolution of deregulation in Indian power sector

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohammad Shahidehpour, Muwaffaq Alomoush, “Restructured electrical power systems:
operation, trading and volatility” Marcel Dekker Pub., 2001, 1st Edition.
2. Kankar Bhattacharya, MathH.J.Boolen, and Jaap E.Daadler, "Operation of restructured
power systems”, Kluwer Academic Pub.,2001, 1st Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. Sally Hunt, "Making competition work in electricity”, JohnWilley and Sons Inc. 2002.
2. Steven Stoft, Power System Economics: Designing Markets for Electricity”, Wiley-IEEE Press,
2002.
3. Allen. J. Wood and Bruce F. Wollen berg, ‘Power Generation, Operation and Control’, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2016, 3rd Edition.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. S.A. Khaparde, A.R. Abhyankar, "Restructured Power Systems", NPTEL Course,
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101005/.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 - - - - 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 2
CO2 3 2 1 - - 3 - - - - 2 - 2 - 2
CO3 3 2 1 - - 3 - - - - 2 - 2 - 2
CO4 3 2 1 - - 3 - - - - 2 - 2 - 2
CO5 3 2 1 - - 3 - - - - 2 - 2 - 2
CO6 3 - - - - 3 2 1 - - 2 1 - - -
Avg 3 2 1 - - 3 2 1 - - 2 1 2 - 2

82
 CONVERTERS AND DRIVES

TIEE3008 SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES LT PC

2 0 23
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the working of special machines like stepper motor, switched reluctance
motor, BLDC motor & PMSM
 To derive torque equation and study the characteristics of special machines
 To design the controller for special machines
 To study the working principle of synchronous reluctance motor
 To simulate closed loop operation of BLDC motor

UNIT I STEPPER MOTORS 6

Constructional features –Principle of operation –Types – Torque predictions – Linear and Non-linear
analysis – Characteristics – Drive circuits – Closed loop control –Applications
UNIT II SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS 6
Constructional features –Principle of operation- Torque prediction–Characteristics-Power controllers –
Control of SRM drive- Speed control-current control-design procedures- Sensor less operation of
SRM – Current sensing-rotor position measurement and estimation methods- sensor less rotor
position estimation-inductance based estimation –applications.

UNIT III PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS DC MOTORS 6

Fundamentals of Permanent Magnets- Types- Principle of operation- Magnetic circuit analysis EMF
and Torque equations- Characteristics- Controller design-Transfer function –Machine, Load and
Inverter-Current and Speed Controller.

UNIT IV PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHROUNOUS MOTORS 6

Permanent Magnet ac Machines, Machine Configurations, PMSM - Principle of operation – EMF and
Torque equations - Phasor diagram - Torque speed characteristics –evaluation of control
characteristics- design of current and speed controllers- Constructional features, operating principle
and characteristics of synchronous reluctance motor.

UNIT V STUDY OF OTHER SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES 6

Principle of operation and characteristics of Hysteresis motor – AC series motors – Linear motor –
Applications.

30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

Using electromagnetic software

1) Simulation of BLDC motor
2) Simulation of SRM motor
3) Simulation of stepper motor
4) Simulation of PMSM motor
83
 5) Simulation of any other special machines
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS
OURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Ability to model and analyze power electronic systems and equipment using
computational software.
CO2 Ability to optimally design magnetics required in special machines based drive systems
using FEM based software tools.
CO3 Ability to analyse the dynamic performance of special electrical machines
CO4 Ability to understand the operation and characteristics of other special electrical
machines.
CO5 Ability to design and conduct experiments towards research.

REFERENCES:

1.Jacek F. Gieras, Dr. Rong-Jie Wang, Professor Maarten J. Kamper - Axial Flux Permanent
Magnet Brushless Machines-Springer Netherlands 2008.
2.Bilgin, Berker Emadi, Ali Jiang, James Weisheng - Switched reluctance motor drives:
fundamentals to applications-CRC 2019.
3.Ramu Krishnan - Permanent Magnet Synchronous and Brushless DC Motor Drives -CRC Press,
Marcel Applications -CRC Press 2009
6.T.Kenjo, ‘ Stepping motors and their microprocessor controls’, Oxford University press, New
Delhi, 2000 Dekker 2009
4.T.J.E. Miller, ‘Brushless magnet and Reluctance motor drives’, Clarendon press, London, 1989
5.R. Krishnan - Switched Reluctance Motor Drives Modeling, Simulation, Analysis, Design, and
Applications -CRC Press 2017.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 - - - - - - 1 - 1 - 1 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 2 - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 - - - - - - 1 - 1 - 1 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - 3 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 - 2.5 1 - 2.2 - 2.3 3 2.8 2.6

TIEE3009 ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES LT P C

2023

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To model & simulate all types of DC machines
 To develop reference frame equations for various elements like R, L and C
 To model an induction (three phase and ‘n’ phase) and synchronous machine
 To drive reference frame equations for induction and synchronous machine
 To study the need and working of multiphase induction and synchronous machine
84
UNIT I MODELING OF BRUSHED-DC ELECTRIC MACHINERY 6

Fundamentals of Operation – Introduction – Governing equations and modeling of Brushed DC-Motor –

Shunt, Series and Compound – State model derivation – Construction of Model of a DC Machine using
state equations- Shunt, Series and Compound..

UNIT II REFERENCE FRAME THEORY 6

Historical background – phase transformation and commutator transformation – transformation of
variables from stationary to arbitrary reference frame .

UNIT III INDUCTION MACHINES 6

Three phase induction machine - equivalent circuit– free acceleration characteristics – voltage and
torque equations in machine variables and arbitrary reference frame variables – Simulation under no-
load and load conditions- Machine variable form, arbitrary reference variable form.

UNIT IV SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 6

Three phase synchronous machine - voltage and torque equations in machine variables and rotor
reference frame variables (Park’s equations).

UNIT V MULTIPHASE (MORE THAN THREE-PHASE) MACHINES CONCEPTS 6

Preliminary Remarks - Necessity of Multiphase Machines - Evolution of Multiphase Machines-
Advantages of Multiphase Machines - Working Principle - Multiphase Induction Machine, Multiphase
Synchronous Machine -Modeling of ‘n’ phase machine. Applications of Multiphase Machines

30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Modeling of DC machines.
2. Simulation under no-load and loaded conditions for a PMDC motor
3. Simulation of smooth starting for DC motor.
4. Simulation under no-load and load conditions of a three phase induction machine in machine
variable form and arbitrary reference variable form.
5. Simulation under no-load and load conditions of a three phase synchronous machine in machine
variable form and arbitrary reference variable form.
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Find the modeling for a brushed DC-Motor (Shunt, Series, Compound and separately
excised motor) and to simulate DC motors using state models
CO2: Apply reference frame theory for, resistive and reactive elements (three phase)
CO3: Compute the equivalent circuit and torque of three phase induction motor and synchronous
motor in machine variable arbitrary reference frame variable
CO4: Find the need and advantages of multiphase machines
CO5: Demonstrate the working of multiphase induction and synchronous machine.
CO6: Compute the model of three phase and multiphase induction and synchronous machine.
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen D. Umans, “Fitzgerald & Kingsley’s Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill, 7 th Edition,
85
 2020.
2. Bogdan M. Wilamowski, J. David Irwin, The Industrial Electronics Handbook, Second Edition,
Power Electronics and Motor Drives, CRC Press, 2011, 1st Edition.
3. Paul C. Krause, Oleg Wasynczuk, Scott D. Sudhoff, Steven D. Pekarek, “Analysis of Electric
Machinery and Drive Systems”, 3rd Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2013.
4. R. Krishnan, Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control, Pearson Education, 1 st
Imprint, 2015, 1st Edition.
5. R.Ramanujam, Modeling and Analysis of Electrical Machines, I.k.International Publishing House
Pvt.Ltd,2018.
6. Chee Mun Ong, Dynamic Simulation of Electric Machinery using MATLAB, Prentice Hall, 1997,
1st Edition.
7. Atif Iqbal,Shaikh Moinoddin, Bhimireddy Prathap Reddy, Electrical Machine Fundamentals with
Numerical Simulation using MATLAB/SIMULINK, Wiley,2021,1st Edition

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - 3 - 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - 3 - 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - 3 - 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 - - - 3 - 2 1 - 3 - 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 - - - 3 - 2 1 - 3 - 2 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - 3 - 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - 3 - 2 3 3 3

TIEE3010 MULTILEVEL POWER CONVERTERS L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn multilevel topology (Symmetry & Asymmetry) with common DC bus link.
 To study the working of cascaded H Bridge, Diode Clamped and Flying Capacitor MLI.
 To study the working of MLI with reduced switch count.
 To simulate three level diode clamped MLI and three level flying capacitor based MLI
with resistive and reactive load
 To simulate the MLI with reduced switch count.

UNIT I MULTILEVEL TOPOLOGIES 6

Introduction – Generalized Topology with a Common DC bus – Converters derived from the
generalized topology – symmetric topology without a common DC link – Asymmetric topology.

UNIT II CASCADED H-BRIDGE MULTILEVEL INVERTERS 6

Introduction -H-Bridge Inverter, Bipolar Pulse Width Modulation, Unipolar Pulse Width Modulation.
Multilevel Inverter Topologies, CHB Inverter with Equal DC Voltage, H-Bridges with Unequal DC
Voltages – PWM, Carrier-Based PWM Schemes, Phase-Shifted Multicarrier Modulation, Level-
Shifted Multicarrier Modulation, Comparison Between Phase- and Level-Shifted PWM Schemes-
86
Staircase Modulation

UNIT III DIODE CLAMPED MULTILEVEL CONVERTER 6

Introduction – Converter structure and Functional Description – Modulation of Multilevel converters

– Voltage balance Control – Effectiveness Boundary of voltage balancing in DCMC converters –
Performance results.

UNIT IV FLYING CAPACITOR MULTILEVEL CONVERTER 6

Introduction – Flying Capacitor topology – Modulation scheme for the FCMC – Dynamic voltage
balance of FCMC.

UNIT V MULTILEVEL CONVERTER WITH REDUCED SWITCH COUNT 6

Multilevel inverter with reduced switch count-structures, working principles and pulse generation
methods.

30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Simulation of Fixed PWM, Sinusoidal PWM for an inverter,

2. Simulation of H bridge inverter with R load .
3. Simulation of three level diode clamped MLI with R load.
4. Simulation of three level capacitor clamped MLI with R load
5. Simulation of MLI with reduced switch configuration.

TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Examine the different topologies of multilevel inverters (MLIs) with and without DC link
capacitor.
CO2: Examine the performance of MLIs with Bipolar Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Unipolar
PWM Carrier-Based PWM Schemes Phase Level Shifted Multicarrier Modulation
CO3: Demonstrate the working principles of Cascaded H-Bridge MLI, diode clamped MLI,
flying capacitor MLI and MLI with reduced switch count
CO4: Analyze the voltage balancing performance in Diode clamped MLI.
CO5: Simulate three level, capacitor clamed and diode clamped MLI with R and RL load.
CO6: Simulate MLI with reduced switch configuration using fundamental switching scheme

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rashid M.H,”Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Prentice Hall India,
Third Edition, New Delhi, 2014 Pearson 4th edition.
2. Sergio Alberto Gonzalez, Santiago Andres Verne, Maria Ines Valla,”Multilevel Converters
for Industrial Applications”, CRC Press, 22-Jul-2013, 20171st Edition.
3. BinWu, Mehdi Narimani,High Power Converters and AC drives by IEEE press 2017, 2 nd
Edition.

REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Thomas A. Lipo, Pulse Width Modulation for Power Converters: Principles and Practice,
D.Grahame Holmes, John Wiley & Sons, Oct-2003, 1st Edition.
2. Fang Lin Luo, Hong Ye,Advanced DC/AC Inverters: Applications in Renewable Energy,
CRC Press, 22-Jan-2013, 2017, 1st Edition.
87
 3. Hani Vahedi, Mohamed Trabelsi, Single-DC-Source Multilevel Inverters, Springer, 2019, 1 st
Edition.
4. Ersan Kabalcı, Multilevel Inverters Introduction and Emergent Topologies, Academic Press
Inc,2021, 1st Edition.
5. Iftekhar Maswood, Dehghani Tafti,Advanced Multilevel Converters and Applications in Grid
Integration, Wiley, 2018, 1st Edition.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 3 - - 2 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 - - 2 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 2 3 - - 2 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.5 2.5 3 3 - 2 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3

TIEE3011 ELECTRICAL DRIVES LTPC

20 23

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students should have the:
 To understand steady state operation and transient dynamics of a motor load system.
 To study and analyze the operation of the converter / chopper fed dc drive, both
qualitatively and quantitatively.
 To study and understand the operation and performance of AC Induction motor drives.
 To study and understand the operation and performance of AC Synchronous motor
drives.
 To analyze and design the current and speed controllers for a closed loop solid state DC
motor drives.

UNIT I DRIVE CHARACTERISTICS 6

Electric drive – Equations governing motor load dynamics – steady state stability – multi quadrant
Dynamics: acceleration, deceleration, starting & stopping – typical load torque characteristics –
Selection of motor.

UNIT II CONVERTER / CHOPPER FED DC MOTOR DRIVE 6

Steady state analysis of the single and three phase converter fed separately excited DC motor drive –
continuous and discontinuous conduction – Time ratio and current limit control – 4 quadrant operation
of converter / chopper fed drive.
UNIT III INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES 6
Stator voltage control – energy efficient drive – v/f control – constant air gap flux – field weakening
mode – voltage / current fed inverter – closed loop control,

88
UNIT IV SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES 6
V/f control and self-control of synchronous motor: Margin angle control and power factor control –
permanent magnet synchronous motor.

UNIT V DESIGN OF CONTROLLERS FOR DRIVES 6

Transfer function for DC motor / load and converter – closed loop control with current and speed
feedback – armature voltage control and field weakening mode – design of controllers; current
controller and speed controller-converter selection and characteristics.

30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Simulation of converter and chopper fed DC drive

2. Simulation of closed loop operation of stator voltage control of induction motor
drive
3. Simulation of closed loop operation of v/f control of induction motor drive
4. Simulation of synchronous motor drive
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion the above subject, students will be able to
CO1: Understand the basic requirements of motor selection for different load profiles.
CO2: Analyse the steady state behavior and stability aspects of drive systems.
CO3: Analyse the dynamic performance of the DC drive using converter and chopper control.
CO4: Simulate the AC drive.
CO5: Design the controller for electrical drives.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gopal K.Dubey, Fundamentals of Electrical Drives, Narosa Publishing House, 2 nd Edition
January 2010.
2. Bimal K.Bose. Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives, Pearson Education, 2002 1 st Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. S.K.Pillai, A First course on Electrical Drives, Wiley Eastern Limited, 3 rd Edition 2012.
2. Murphy J.M.D and Turnbull, Thyristor Control of AC Motor, Pergamon Press, Oxford 1988, 1st
Edition.
3. Gopal K.Dubey, Power semiconductor controlled Drives, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey,1989,
1st Edition.
4. R.Krishnan, Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control, Prentice hall of India,
2001, 1st Edition.
MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 2
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 3
CO6 3 2 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 2 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 3 3 2

89
TIEE3012 SMPS AND UPS LTPC
20 23

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the working of isolated & non-isolated DC-DC converters
 To design isolated & non-isolated DC-DC converters.
 To drive the equations related with converter dynamics.
 To design and simulate P, PI & PID controller for buck, boost and buck-boost
converters.
 To identify and study different configurations of the UPS.

UNIT I ANALYSIS OF NON-ISOLATED DC-DC CONVERTERS 6

Basic topologies: Buck, Boost and Buck-Boost - Principles of operation – Continuous conduction
mode– Concepts of volt-sec balance and charge balance – Analysis and design based on steady-
state relationships – Introduction to discontinuous conduction mode.

UNIT II ANALYSIS OF ISOLATED DC-DC CONVERTERS 6

Introduction - classification- forward- flyback- pushpull – half bridge – full bridge topologies- C’uk
converter as cascade combination of boost followed by buck – isolated version of C’uk converter -
design of SMPS – Introduction to design of magnetic components for SMPS, using relevant
software- Simulation of bidirectional DC DC converter (both non-isolated and isolated) considering
EV as an example application.

UNIT III CONVERTER DYNAMICS 6

AC equivalent circuit analysis – State space averaging – Circuit averaging – Transfer function
model for buck, boost and buck-boost converters – Simulation of basic topologies using state
space model derived – Comparison with the circuit model based simulation already carried out.

UNIT IV CONTROLLER DESIGN 6

Review of P, PI, and PID control concepts – gain margin and phase margin – Bode plot based
analysis – Design of controller for buck, boost and buck-boost converters.

UNIT V POWER CONDITIONERS AND UPS 6

Introduction – Power line disturbances – Power conditioners – UPS: Offline and On-line – Need for
filters – Filter for PWM VSI – Front-end battery charger – boost charger.

30 PERIODS
LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Simulation of Basic topologies.

2. Simulation of bidirectional DC DC converter (both non-isolated and isolated)
considering
EV as an example application.
3. Simulation of basic topologies using state space model derived – Comparison with
the circuit model based simulation already carried out.
4. Simulation study of controller design for basic topologies.
5. Simulation of battery charger for EV applications.
90
 TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should have the following capabilities:
CO1: Demonstrate the working of buck boost and buck- boost converters in
continuous and discontinuous conduction mode.
CO2: Build buck/boost converters using suitable design method.
CO3: Analyze the behaviors of isolated DC-DC converters and to design SMPS for battery
operated vehicle.
CO4: Compute state space averaged model and transfer function for buck, boost and buck-
boost converters.
CO5: Demonstrate the P, PI and PID controller performance analytically and by simulation
for buck boost and buck- boost converters.
CO6: Compare the different topologies of UPS and also simulate them.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robert W. Erickson & Dragon Maksimovic, ” Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Third
Edition, 2020
2. Ned Mohan,” Power Electronics: A First Course”, Johnwiley, 2013.
3. Marian K. Kazimierczuk and Agasthya Ayachit,”Laboratory Manual for Pulse-Width Modulated
DC– DC Power Converters”, Wiley 2016.
4. Power Electronics handbook, Industrial Electronics series, S.K.Varenina, CRC press, 2002.
5. Power Electronic Converters, Teuvo Suntio, Tuomas Messo, Joonas Puukko, First Edition
2017.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 2 - 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 2 - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 2 - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 2.5 - 3 3 3 3

TIEE3013 POWER ELECTRONICS FOR RENEWABLE LTPC

ENERGY SYSTEMS 2023

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the various types of renewable sources of energy.
 To understand the electrical machines to be used for wind energy conversion
systems.
 To learn the principles of power converters used in solar PV system.
91
  To study the principle of power converters used in Wind system.
 To simulate the AC-DC, AC-AC Converters, Matrix Converters and PWM Inverters.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS 6

Classification of Energy Sources – Importance of Non-conventional energy sources – Advantages

and disadvantages of conventional energy sources - Environmental aspects of energy - Impacts of
renewable energy generation on the environment - Qualitative study of renewable energy
resources: Ocean energy, Biomass energy, Hydrogen energy, - Solar Photovoltaic (PV), Fuel cells:
Operating principles and characteristics, Wind Energy: Nature of wind, Types, control strategy,
operating area.

UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES FOR WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS 6

(WECS)
Construction, Principle of operation and analysis: Squirrel Cage Induction Generator (SCIG),
Doubly Fed Induction Generator (DFIG) - Permanent Magnet Synchronous Generator (PMSG).

UNIT III POWER CONVERTERS AND ANALYSIS OF SOLAR PV SYSTEMS 6

Power Converters: Line commutated converters (inversion-mode) - Boost and buck-boost

converters- selection of inverter, battery sizing, array sizing. Simulation of line commutated
converters, buck/boost converters. Analysis: Block diagram of the solar PV systems - Types of
Solar PV systems: Stand-alone PV systems, Grid integrated solar PV Systems - Grid Connection
Issues.

UNIT IV POWER CONVERTERS FOR WIND SYSTEMS 6

Power Converters: Three-phase AC voltage controllers- AC-DC-AC converters: uncontrolled
rectifiers, PWM Inverters, Grid-Interactive Inverters - Matrix converter.

UNIT V HYBRID RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS 9

Need for Hybrid Systems- Range and type of Hybrid systems- Case studies of Diesel-PV, Wind-
PV, Micro hydel-PV, Biomass-Diesel systems - Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT).

30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Simulation on modelling of Solar PV System- V I Characteristics
2. Simulation on Modelling of fuel cell- V I Characteristics
3. Simulation of self- excited Induction Generator.
4. Simulation of DFIG/ PMSG based Wind turbine.
5. Simulation on Grid integration of RES.

TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Examine the available renewable energy sources.
CO2: Demonstrate the working principles of electrical machines and power converters
used for wind energy conversion system
CO3: Demonstrate the principles of power converters used for solar PV systems
CO4: Examine the available hybrid renewable energy systems.
CO5: Simulate AC-DC converters, buck/boost converters, AC-AC converters and PWM
inverters.
92
REFERENCES:
1. S.N.Bhadra, D. Kastha, & S. Banerjee “Wind Electrical Systems”, Oxford University Press,
2009, 7th impression.
2. Rashid .M. H “Power electronics Hand book”, Academic press,2nd Edition, 2006 4th Edition,
2017
3. Rai. G.D, “Non-conventional energy sources”, Khanna publishers, 6 th Edition, 2017.
4. Rai. G.D,” Solar energy utilization”, Khanna publishers, 5th Edition, 2008.
5. Gray, L. Johnson, “Wind energy system”, prentice hall of india, 2nd Edition, 2006.
6. H.Khan "Non-conventional Energy sources ",Tata McGraw-hill Publishing Company, New
Delhi, 2017, 3rd Edition.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 - 2 - - - - - - 2 - 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 - 2 - - - - - - 2 - 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 - 2 - - - - - - 2 - 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 - 3 - - - - - - 2 - 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 2.25 3 3 - - 3 - 2 - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 2 3 3 - - 3 - 2 - 2.2 3 3 3

TIEE3014 CONTROL OF POWER ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basics of control system simulation.
 To do symbolic calculation.
 To study the principles of sliding mode control and the way of apply smc for buck
converter.
 To learn the concept of power factor correction.
 To design simulate smc for buck converter and power factor correction circuit with
controller.

UNIT I SIMULATION BASICS IN CONTROL SYSTEMS 6

Transfer Function-How to build transfer function, identify Poles, zeros, draw time response plots,
bode plot (Bode Plots for Multiplication Factors, Constant, Single and Double Integration
Functions, Single and Double Differentiation Functions, Single Pole and Single Zero Functions,
RHP Pole and RHP Zero Functions), state space modelling-transfer function from state space
Model.

UNIT II SYMBOLIC CALCULATIONS 6

Symbolic Variables - Symbolic Vector Variables, Commands for Handling Polynomial Expressions
- Extracting Parts of a Polynomial -. Factorization and Roots of Polynomials, Symbolic Matrix
Algebra - Operations with Symbolic Matrices - Other Symbolic Matrix Operations.

93
UNIT III SLIDING MODE CONTROL BASICS 6
Introduction- Introduction to Sliding-Mode Control- Basics of Sliding-Mode Theory- Application of
Sliding-Mode Control to DC-DC Converters—Principle-Sliding mode control of buck converter.

UNIT IV POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CIRCUITS 6

Introduction, Operating Principle of Single-Phase PFCs, Control of boost converter based PFCs,
Designing the Inner Average-Current-Control Loop, Designing the Outer Voltage-Control Loop,
Example of Single-Phase PFC Systems.

UNIT V CONTROLLER DESIGN FOR PFC CIRCUITS 6

Power factor correction circuit using other SMPS topologies: C’uk and SEPIC converter - PFC
circuits employing bridgeless topologies.
30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Simulation exercises on zero, first and second order basic blocks.
2. Simulation exercises based on symbolic calculations.
3. Simulation of Sliding mode control based buck converter.
4. Simulation of Single-Phase PFC circuit employing boost converter.
5. Simulation of Single-Phase PFC circuit employing C’uk converters.

TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should have the:
CO1: To calculate transfer function for constant, differential, integral, First order and Second order
factors.
CO2: To illustrate the effect of poles and zero’s in the ‘s’ plane.
CO3: To select Symbolic equations for solving problems related with Matrices, Polynomial and
vectors.
CO4: To compute the control expression for DC – DC buck converter using sliding mode control
theory.
CO5: To determine the controller expression for power factor correction circuits.
CO6: To simulate sliding mode control of buck converter and power factor correction circuit.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Feedback Control problems using MATLAB and the Control system tool box By Dean
Frederick and Joe Chow, 2000, 1st Edition, Cengage Learning.
2. Ned Mohan,”Power Electronics: A First Course”, Johnwiley, 2013, 1st Edition.
3. Marian K. Kazimierczuk and AgasthyaAyachit,”Laboratory Manual for Pulse-Width
Modulated DC-DC Power Converters”, Wiley 2016, 1st Edition.
4. Power Electronics handbook, Industrial Electronics series, S.K.Varenina, CRC press, 2002,
1st Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. Sliding mode control for Switching Power Converters:, Techniques and Implementation,
Slew-Chong Tan, Yuk Ming Lai Chi-Kong Tse, 1st Edition, CRC Press.
2. Andre Kislovski, “Dynamic Analysis of Switching-Mode DC/DC Converters”, Springer 1991.
3. MATLAB Symbolic Algebra and Calculus Tools, Lopez Cesar, Apress, 2014.

94
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 2 - 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 2 - 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 2 - 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 2 - 3 3 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 2 - 3 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 2 - 3 3 3 3

Avg 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 2 - 3 3 3 3

EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

TIEE3015 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN LT P C

2023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the Building Blocks of an embedded System and Software Tools
 To emphasize the role of Input/output interfacing with Bus Communication protocol.
 To illustrate the ISR and scheduling for the multitasking
process.
 To explain the basics of a Real-time operating system
 To analyze the applications based on embedded design approaches

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 6

Introduction to Embedded Systems –Structural units in Embedded processor, selection of
processor & memory devices- DMA — Memory management methods- Timer and Counting
devices, Real Time Clock, In-circuit emulator, Target Hardware Debugging.

UNIT II EMBEDDED NETWORKING 6

Embedded Networking: Introduction, I/O Device Ports & Buses– Serial Bus communication
protocols RS232 standard – RS485 – CAN Bus- Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) – Inter-
Integrated Circuits (I2C).

UNIT III INTERRUPTS THE SERVICE MECHANISM AND DEVICE DRIVER 6

Programmed-I/O busy-wait approach without interrupt service mechanism-ISR concept-interrupt
sources – multiple interrupts – context and periods for context switching, interrupt latency and
deadline – Introduction to Device Drivers.

95
UNIT IV RTOS-BASED EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 6

Introduction to basic concepts of RTOS- Task, process & threads, interrupt routines in RTOS,
Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Preemptive and non-preemptive scheduling, Task
communication- shared memory, message passing- Interprocess Communication- Introduction to
process synchronization using semaphores.

UNIT V EMBEDDED SYSTEM APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT 6

Embedded Product Development Life Cycle - Case Study: Precision Agriculture- Autonomous car.
30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Laboratory exercise: Use any Embedded processor/IDE/open source platform to give
hands-on training on basic concepts of embedded system design:
a) Introduction to IDE and Programming Environment.
b) Configure timer block for signal generation (with given frequency).
c) Interrupts programming example using GPIO.
d) I2C communication with peripherals
e) Master-slave communication between processors using SPI.
f) Networking of processor using Wi-Fi.
g) Basic RTOS concept and programming

2. Assignment: Introduction to VxWorks, чC/OS-II, RT Linux

3. Embedded systems-based Mini project.
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

After completion of the above subject, students will be able to understand

CO1: The hardware functionals and software strategies required to develop various
Embedded systems
CO2: The basic differences between various Bus communication standards
CO3: The incorporation of the interface as Interrupt services
CO4: The various scheduling algorithms through a Real-time operating system.
CO5: The various embedded concepts for developing automation applications.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rajkamal, ‘Embedded system-Architecture, Programming, Design, McGraw-Hill Edu, 3rd
edition 2017
2. Peckol, “Embedded system Design”, John Wiley & Sons,2010.

REFERENCES:
1. Shibu. K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, TataMcgraw Hill, 2nd edition 2017.
st
2. Lya B.Das,” Embedded Systems” ,Pearson Education, 1 edition 2012.
3. Parag H.Dave,Himanshu B.Dave,” Embedded Systems-Concepts ,Design and
Programming, Pearson Education,2015, 1st edition.
4. Elicia White, “Making Embedded systems”, O’Reilly Series ,SPD,2011, 1st edition.
5. Jonathan W. Valvano, ‘Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real-time Interfacing’,
Cengage Learning , 3rd edition 2010.
6. Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture”, Newnes, 2nd edition, 2013.

96
List of Open Source Software/ Learning websites:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102045
2. https://ece.uwaterloo.ca/~dwharder/icsrts/Lecture_materials/A_practical_introduction_to_re
al-time_systems_for_undergraduate_engineering.pdf
3. https://www.circuitbasics.com/basics-of-the-i2c-communication-protocol/
4. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/embedded_systems/es_interrupts.htm
5. https://www.theengineeringprojects.com/2016/11/examples-of-embedded-
systems.html#:~:text=Embedded%20Product%3A%20Automatic%20Washing%20Machine,
done%20by%20your%20machine%20itself.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 2 1 - - - 1 - - - 3 1 2
Avg 3 2.2 2 2.2 1 - - - 1 - - - 2 1.4 2.6

TIEE3016 EMBEDDED C- PROGRAMMING LT P C

2023

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To expose the students to the fundamentals of embedded Programming
 To Introduce the GNU C Programming Tool Chain.
 To study the basic concepts of embedded C.
 To teach the basics of 8051 Programming
 To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise in revising & familiarizing the concepts
acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills.

UNIT I BASIC C PROGRAMMING 6

Typical C Program Development Environment - Introduction to C Programming - Structured

Program Development in C - Data Types and Operators - C Program Control - C Functions -
Introduction to Arrays.

UNIT II EMBEDDED C 6

Adding Structure to ‘C’ Code: Object-oriented programming with C, Header files for Project and
Port, Examples. Meeting Real-time constraints: Creating hardware delays - Need for timeout
mechanism - Creating loop timeouts - Creating hardware timeouts.

UNIT III 8051 Programming in C 6

Data types and time delay in 8051, I/O programming in 8051, Logic operations in 8051, Data
conversion program in 8051 Accessing code ROM space in 8051, Data serialization using 8051

97
UNIT IV 8051 SERIAL PORT AND INTERRUPT PROGRAMMING IN C 6
Basics of serial communication, 8051 interface to RS232- serial port programming in 8051. 8051
interrupts and programming, Programming for timer configuration.

UNIT V 8051 INTERFACING 6

8051: ADC interfacing , DAC interfacing, Sensor interfacing, LCD interfacing, Stepper motor
interfacing.
30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Laboratory exercise: Use 8051 microcontroller/Embedded processor/IDE/open source

platform to give hands-on training on Embedded C- programming.

a. Introduction to IDE (like code blocks, vscode ,etc)and Programming Environment (like
Keililu vision, Proteus)
b. Configuring an I/O port using bitwise programming.
c. Configuring timer for generating hardware delay.
d. Flashing an LED using an interrupt
e. Serial communication using UART port of 8051
f. Interfacing an ADC with 8051
g. Interfacing an analog sensor with 8051
h. Interfacing 16x2 LCD with 8051
i. configuring timer for generating PWM signal
j. Interfacing a stepper motor with 8051

2. Assignment: Introduction to Arduino IDE, Raspberry Pi

3. Embedded C-Programming -based Mini project.

TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will have the ability to
CO1: Deliver insight into embedded C programming and its salient features for embedded
systems.
CO2:Illustrate the software and hardware architecture for distributed computing in embedded
systems
CO3: Develop a solution for problems by using the conceptlearnednt in programming using the
embedded controllers
CO4: Develop simple applications with 8051 by using its various features and interfacing with
various external hardware.
CO5: Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge upgradation on
recent trends in embedded programming skills.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “C How to Program”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education
Limited, 2022, 1st edition.
2. Michael J Pont, "Embedded C", Addison-Wesley, An imprint of Pearson Education, 2002.
3. William von Hagen, "The Definitive Guide to GCC", 2nd Edition, Apress Inc., 2006.
4. Gowrishankar S and Veena A, "Introduction to Python Programming", CRC Press, Taylor &
Francis Group, 2019.
98
REFERENCES:
1. Noel Kalicharan, "Learn to Program with C", Apress Inc., 2015, 1 st edition.
2. Steve Oualline, "Practical C programming", O'Reilly Media, 1997, 3 rd edition.
3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice G. Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, ‘The 8051
Microcontroller and Embedded Systems’ Prentice Hall, 2 nd Edition 2007.
4. Myke Predko, “Programming and customizing the 8051 microcontrollers”,McGraww
Hill 2000, 1st edition.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning websites:

● https://www.hackerrank.com/
● https://www.cprogramming.com/
● https://www.allaboutcircuits.com/technical-articles/introduction-to-the-c-programming-
language-for-embedded-applications/
● https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_cs42/preview
● https://microcontrollerslab.com/8051-microcontroller-tutorials-c/
● https://www.circuitstoday.com/getting-started-with-keil-uvision

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 1 1 2 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO2 1 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO3 2 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 1 - - - 1 - - - 2 3 2
Avg 2 1.6 2.2 2.2 1.8 - - - 1 - - - 1.4 2.4 2

TIEE3017 EMBEDDED PROCESSORS LT P C

2023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the architecture of the ARM processor.
 To train students in ARM programming.
 To discuss memory management, append location development with an ARM processor.
 To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise in revising & familiarizing the concepts
 To impart the knowledge on single board embedded processors.

UNIT I ARM ARCHITECTURE 6

Architecture – Memory Organization – addressing modes -Registers – Pipeline - Interrupts –
Coprocessors – Interrupt Structure

UNIT II ARM MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMING 6

ARM general Instruction set – Thumb instruction set –Introduction to DSP on ARM- basic
programming.

UNIT III PERIPHERALS OF ARM 6

ARM: I/O Memory – EEPROM – I/O Ports – SRAM –Timer –UART - Serial Communication with
PC – ADC/DAC Interfacing-stepper motor interfacing
99
UNIT IV ARM COMMUNICATION 6
ARM With CAN, I2C, and SPI protocols

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO SINGLE BOARD EMBEDDED PROCESSOR 6

Raspberry Pi Architecture - Booting Up RPi- Operating System and Linux Commands -Working
with RPi using Python and Sensing Data using Python-programming - GPIO and interfacing
peripherals With Raspberry Pi
30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENTS: 30 PERIODS

1. Laboratory exercise:
a) Programming with IDE - ARM microcontroller
b) Advanced Timer Features, PWM Generator.
c) RTC interfacing with ARM using Serial communication programming, Stepper motor
control.
d) ARM-Based Wireless Environmental Parameter Monitoring System displayed through
Mobile device.
2. Seminar:
a) ARM and GSM/GPS interfacing
b) Introduction to ARM Cortex Processor
3. Raspberry Pi based Mini project.

TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will have the ability to
CO1: Interpret the basics and functionality of processor functional blocks.
CO2: Observe the specialty of RISC processor Architecture.
CO3: Incorporate the I/O hardware interface of processor with peripherals.
CO4: Emphasis the communication features of the processor.
CO5: Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in commercial embedded processors.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Steve Furber, ‘ARM system on chip architecture’,Addisonn Wesley,2nd Edition,2015.
2. Andrew N. Sloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, John Rayfield’s ARM System Developer’s
Guide Designing and Optimizing System Software’, Elsevier 2004, 1 st Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. William Hohl, ‘ ARMAssebly Language’ Fundamentals and Techniques, CRC Press, 2 nd Edition
2014.
2. Rajkamal,” Microcontrollers Architecture, Programming, Interfacing, & System Design,
Pearson,2012, 2nd Edition.
3. ARM Architecture Reference Manual, LPC214x User Manual www.Nuvoton .com/websites on
Advanced ARM Cortex Processors
4. ARM System Developer’s Guide: Designing and Optimizing System Software 1st Edition
(Designing and Optimizing System Software) Publisher: Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2011.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning websites:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106111
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_cs15/preview

100
 3. https://www.csie.ntu.edu.tw/~cyy/courses/assembly/12fall/lectures/handouts/lec08_ARMarc
h.pdf
4. https://maxembedded.com/2013/07/introduction-to-single-board-computing/
5. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=J4fhE4Pp55E&list=PLGs0VKk2DiYypuwUUM2wxzcI9B
JHK4Bfh

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 1 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 2
CO2 1 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 2 1 - - - 1 - - - 1 2 2
Avg 2.2 1.6 2.2 2 1.8 - - - 1 - - - 1.8 2.2 2.4

TIEE3018 EMBEDDED CONTROL FOR ELECTRIC DRIVES L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the control concept for electrical drives
 To emphasize the need of embedded systems for controlling the electrical drives
 To provide knowledge about various embedded system-based control strategies for
electrical drives
 To Impart the knowledge of optimization and machine learning techniques used for
electrical drives
 To familiarize the high-performance computing for electrical drives.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC DRIVES 6

Electric drives and its classification-Four-quadrant drive-Solid State Controlled Drives-Machine
learning and optimization techniques for electrical drives.

UNIT II EMBEDDED SYSTEM FOR MOTOR CONTROL 6

Embedded Processors choice for motor control- Sensors and interface modules for Electric drives-
IoT for Electrical drives applications

UNIT III INDUCTION MOTOR CONTROL 6

Speed control methods-PWM techniques- VSI fed three-phase induction motor- Fuzzy logic Based
speed control for three-phase induction motor- Embedded processor based three phase induction
motor speed control.

UNIT IV BLDC MOTOR CONTROL 6

Overview of BLDC Motor -Speed control methods -PWM techniques- Embedded processor based
BDLC motor speed control.

101
UNIT V SRM MOTOR CONTROL 6
Overview of SRM Motor -Speed control methods -PWM techniques- Embedded processor based
SRM motor speed control.
30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENTS: 30 PERIODS

1. Laboratory exercise: Use any System level simulator/MATLAB/open source platform to

give hands-on training on simulation study on Electric drives and control.

a. Simulation of four quadrant operation and speed control of DC motor

b. Simulation of 3-phase inverter.
c. Simulation of Speed control of Induction motor using any suitable software package.
d. Simulation of Speed control of BLDC motor using any suitable software package.
e. Simulation of Speed control of SRM using any suitable software package
2. Seminar: IoT-based Control and Monitoring for DC Motor/ any Electric drives.
3. Mini project.: Any Suitable Embedded processor-based speed control of Motors
(DC/IM/BLDC/PMSM/SRM)
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will have the ability to
CO1: Interpret the significance of embedded control of electrical drives
CO2: Deliver insight into various control strategies for electrical drives.
CO3: Developing knowledge of Machine learning and optimization techniques for motor control.
CO4: Develop embedded system solutions for real-time application such as Electric vehicles and
UAVs.
CO5: Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded system skills required for motor control strategy.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. R.Krishnan, “Electric Motor Drives – Modeling, Analysis and Control”,Prentice-Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi,2010, 1st Edition.
2. Steve Kilts, "Advanced FPGA Design: Architecture, Implementation, and Optimization"
Willey, 2007, 1st Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. VedamSubramanyam, “Electric Drives – Concepts and Applications”, Tata McGraw- Hill
publishing company Ltd., New Delhi, 2002, 2nd Edition.
2. K. Venkataratnam ,Special Electrical Machines, Universities Press, 2014, 1 st Edition.
3. Steve Furber, ‘ARM system on chip architecture’, Addision Wesley, 2nd Edition 2015.
4. Ron Sass and AnderewG.Schmidt, “ Embedded System design with platform FPGAs:
Principles and Practices”, Elsevier, 2010, 1st Edition.
5. Tim Wescott , Applied Control Theory for Embedded Systems , Elsevier, 2006, 1st Edition.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1) https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/104/108104140/
2) https://www.embedded.com/mcus-or-dsps-which-is-in-motor-control/
3) https://www.e3s-
conferences.org/articles/e3sconf/pdf/2019/13/e3sconf_SeFet2019_01004.pdf
4) https://www.electronics-tutorials.ws/blog/pulse-width-modulation.html
5) http://kaliasgoldmedal.yolasite.com/resources/SEM/SRM.pdf
102
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 1 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 2
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 2 1 - - - 1 - - - 2 2 3
Avg 2.4 1.6 2.4 2.4 1.8 - - - 1 - - - 2 2 2.6

TIEE3019 SMART SYSTEM AUTOMATION LT P C

2023

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the smart system technologies and its role in real time applications
 To teach the architecture and requirements of Home Automation.
 To provide an insight into smart appliances and energy management concepts.
 To familiarize the design and needs of smart wearable devices
 To teach the basics of robotics and its role for automation.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Overview of a smart system - Hardware and software selection - Smart sensors and Actuators –
Communication protocols used for smart systems.

UNIT II HOME AUTOMATION 6

Home Automation – System Architecture - Essential Components- Design Considerations: Control
Unit, Sensing Requirements, Communication, Data Security.

UNIT III SMART APPLIANCES AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT 6

Significance of smart appliances for energy management -Smart Meters: Significance, Architecture
& Energy Measurement Technique – Security Considerations.

UNIT IV SMART WEARABLE DEVICES 6

Body Area Networks - Sensors– communication protocol for Wearable devices- Application of
Smart Wearable in Healthcare & Activity Monitoring.

UNIT V EMBEDDED SYSTEMS AND ROBOTICS 6

Fundamental concepts in Robotics- Robots and Controllers components - Embedded processor
based: pick and place robot- Mobile Robot Design- UAV.
30 PERIODS

103
LAB COMPONENTS: 30 PERIODS
1. Laboratory exercise: Use Arduino/ R pi/ any other Embedded processors to give
hands on training to understand concepts related to smart automation.
a) Hands on experiments based on Ubidots & Thing speak / Open-source Analytics
Platform
b) Design and implementation of a smart home system .
c) Bluetooth Based Home Automation Project using Android Phone
d) GSM Based Home Devices Control
e) Pick and place robots using Arduino/ any suitable Embedded processor
2. Assignment: Revolution of Smart Automation system across the world and its
current scope available in India
3. Mini project: Design of a Smart Automation system ( for any application of
students choice)

TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will have the ability to
CO1: Understand the concepts of smart system design and its present developments.
CO2: Illustrate different embedded open-source and cost-effective techniques for developing
solution for real time applications.
CO3: Acquire knowledge on different platforms and Infrastructure for Smart system design.
CO4: Infer about smart appliances and energy management concepts.
CO5: Improve Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge upgradation on
embedded system technologies.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Grimm, Christoph, Neumann, Peter, Mahlknech and Stefan, Embedded Systems for
Smart Appliances and Energy Management, Springer 2013, 1st Edition.
2. KazemSohraby, Daniel Minoli and TaiebZnati, Wireless Sensor Networks Technology,
Protocols, and Applications, John Wiley & Sons, 2007, 1st Edition.
3. NilanjanDey, Amartya Mukherjee, Embedded Systems and Robotics with Open-Source
Tools, CRC press, 2016, 1st Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Bräunl, Embedded Robotics, Springer, 2003.
2. Raj Kamal, Embedded Systems - Architecture, Programming and Design, McGraw- Hill,
2008
3. Karim Yaghmour, Embedded Android, O'Reilly, 2013.
4. Steven Goodwin, Smart Home Automation with Linux and Raspberry Pi, Apress , 2013
5. C.K. Toh, AdHoc mobile wireless networks, Prentice Hall, Inc, 2002.
6. Anna Ha´c, Wireless Sensor Network Designs, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 2003.
7. J. J. Craig, “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education.
8. Y. Koren, “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw-Hill.
9. Robert Faludi, Wireless Sensor Networks, O’Reilly, 2011.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://microcontrollerslab.com/home-automation-projects-ideas/
2. https://www.learnrobotics.org/blog/simple-robot/
3. https://robolabor.ee/homelab/en/iot

104
 4. https://electrovolt.ir/wp-
content/uploads/2018/03/Exploring_Raspberry_Pi_Molloy_Derek_ElectroVolt.ir_.pdf
5. http://www.robot.bmstu.ru/files/books/(Ebook%20-%20English)%20Mcgraw-
Hil,%20Pic%20Robotics%20--%20A%20Beginner'S%20Guide%20To%20Robotic.pdf

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 1 3 1 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 1 3
CO3 2 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 1 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 2 2 3
Avg 2.4 1.6 2.4 1.6 3 - - - 1 - - - 1.4 1.8 2.4

TIEE3020 EMBEDDED SYSTEM FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS LT P C

2023

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To expose the students to the fundamentals and building of Electronic Engine Control systems.
 To teach on sensor functional components for vehicles.
 To discuss on programmable controllers for vehicles management systems.
 To teach logics of automation & communication techniques for vehicle communication.
 To introduce the infotainment system development.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS 6

Overview of Automotive systems, fuel economy, air-fuel ratio, emission limits and vehicle
performance; Electronic control Unit– open-source ECU.

UNIT II SENSORS AND ACTUATORS FOR AUTOMOTIVES 6

Review of automotive sensors- sensors interface to the ECU, Smart sensor and actuators for
automotive applications.

UNIT III VEHICLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 6

Energy Management system -Adaptive cruise control - anti-locking braking system - Safety and
Collision Avoidance.

UNIT IV ONBOARD DIAGONSTICS AND COMMUNICATION 6

OBD , Vehicle communication protocols- Bluetooth, CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY and MOST.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 6

Navigation- Autonomous car- Role of IoT in Automotive systems.

30 PERIODS
105
 LAB COMPONENTS: 30 PERIODS
1. 1. Laboratory exercise: Use MATLAB SIMULINK /equivalent simulation /open source
tools
a) Simulation study of automotive sensors and actuators components
b) Adaptive cruise control, Anti-Lock Braking System
c) CAN Connectivity in an Automotive Application using vehicle network toolbox
d) Interfacing a sensor used in car with microcontroller.
e) Establishing connection between Bluetooth module and microcontroller.
2. Assignment: AUTOSAR
3. Mini project : Battery Management system for EV batteries.

TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will have the ability in
CO1: Insight into the significance of the role of embedded system for automotive applications.
CO2: Illustrate the need, selection of sensors and actuators and interfacing with ECU
CO3: Develop the Embedded concepts for vehicle management and control systems.
CO4: Demonstrate the need of Electrical vehicle and able to apply the embedded system
technology for various aspects of EVs
CO5: Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design and its application in automotive systems.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. William B. Ribbens ,”Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Elseiver,8th Edition, 2017.
2. Jurgen, R., Automotive Electronics Hand Book, McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 1999.
3. L.Vlacic,M.Parent,F.Harahima,”Intelligent Vehicle Technologies”,SAE International, 2001, 1 st
Edition, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Ali Emedi, Mehrdedehsani, John M Miller , “Vehicular Electric power system- land, Sea, Air
and Space Vehicles” Marcel Decker, 2004, 1st Edition.
2. Jack Erjavec,JeffArias,”Alternate Fuel Technology-Electric ,Hybrid& Fuel Cell
Vehicles”,Cengage ,2012, 2nd Edition.
3. Electronic Engine Control technology – Ronald K Jurgen Chilton’s guide to Fuel Injection –
Ford 2nd Edition, 2004.
4. Automotive Electricals / Electronics System and Components, Tom Denton, 5 th Edition, 2017.
5. Uwe Kiencke, Lars Nielsen, “Automotive Control Systems: For Engine, Driveline, and
Vehicle”, Springer; 1st Edition, 2005.
th
6. Automotive Electricals Electronics System and Components, Robert Bosch Gmbh, 5 Edition,
2014.
7. Automotive Hand Book, Robert Bosch, Bently Publishers, 10 th Edition, 2018.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1) https://www.autosar.org/fileadmin/ABOUT/AUTOSAR_EXP_Introduction.pdf
2) https://microcontrollerslab.com/can-communication-protocol/
3) https://ackodrive.com/car-guide/different-types-of-car-sensors/
4) https://www.tomtom.com/blog/automated-driving/what-is-adaptive-cruise-control/
5) https://prodigytechno.com/difference-between-lin-can-and-flexray-protocols/
6) https://www.synopsys.com/automotive/what-is-autonomous-car.html

106
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 3
CO2 2 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 1 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO5 3 3 1 2 1 - - - 1 - - - 2 2 3
Avg 2.4 3 2.4 2.4 2 - - - 1 - - - 1.8 1.8 2.6

TIEE3021 VLSI DESIGN LT P C

2023
COURSE OBJECTIVES

 To explain the basic concepts of CMOS and

 To introduce the IC fabrication methods
 To introduce the Reconfigurable Processor technologies
 To introduce the basics of analog VLSI design and its importance.
 To learn about the programming of Programmable device using Hardware description
Language.

UNIT I CMOS BASICS 6

MOSFET Scaling - CMOS logic design- Dynamic CMOS –Transmission Gates- BiCMOS

UNIT II IC FABRICATION 6
CMOS IC Fabrications: n well, p well, twin tub, SoI - Design Rules and Layout.

UNIT III PROGRAMABLE LOGIC DEVICES 6

PAL, PLA, CPLD architecture and application.

UNIT IV RECONFIGURABLE PROCESSOR 6

FPGA- Architecture, FPGA based application development- Introduction to FPAA.

UNIT V HDL PROGRAMMING 6

Verilog HDL- Overview - structural and behavioural modeling concepts-Design examples- Carry
Look ahead adders, ALU, Shift Registers.
30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENTS: 30 PERIODS

1. Laboratory exercise : Use any FPGA Board /IDE/open source package/ platform to give
hands on training on CMOS design/ reconfigurable processor based applications.

a) CMOS logic circuit simulation using any open source software package
b) Experiments : structural and behavioural modeling based Verilog HDL programs
c) Experiment: Combinational and sequential Digital logic implementation with
FPGA.
d) Implementation of carry look ahead adder with FPGA
107
 e) Implementation of ALU with FPGA
2. Assignment : Low Power VLSI.
3. FPGA based Mini project .
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will have the ability to
CO1: Develop CMOS design techniques
CO2: Learn and build IC fabrication
CO3: Explain the need of reconfigurable computing with PLDs.
CO4: Design and development of reprogrammable FPGA.
CO5: Illustrate and develop HDL computational processes with improved design strategies.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. M.J.S Smith, “Application Specific integrated circuits”,Addition Wesley Longman Inc. 1 st Edition
2010.
2. Kamran Eshraghian,Douglas A.pucknell and Sholeh Eshraghian,”Essentials of VLSI circuits and
system”, Prentice Hall India,2005, 1st Edition.
REFERENCES:
1. Donald G. Givone, “Digital principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill 2002, 1 st Edition.
2. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Fundamentals of Logic design”, Thomson Learning, 7 th Edition 2013.
3. Nurmi, Jari (Ed.) "Processor Design System-On-Chip Computing for ASICs and FPGAs"
Springer, 2007, 1st Edition.
4. Joao Cardoso, Michael Hübner, "Reconfigurable Computing: From FPGAs to
Hardware/Software Codesign" Springer, 2011, 1st Edition.
5. Pierre-Emmanuel Gaillardon, Reconfigurable Logic: Architecture, Tools, and Applications,
1st Edition, CRC Press , 2018.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1) https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/107/108107129/
2) http://gn.dronacharya.info/ECEDept/Downloads/QuestionPapers/7th_Sem/VLSI-
DESIGN/UNIT-1/Lecture-3.pdf
3) https://web.itu.edu.tr/~ateserd/vlsi2/2007/FPGAs&CPLD.pdf
4) https://kanchiuniv.ac.in/coursematerials/GSK_Notes_on_PLD_in_VLSI_design.pdf
5) https://www.xilinx.com/products/silicon-devices/resources/programming-an-fpga-an-
introduction-to-how-it-works.html
6) https://www.allaboutcircuits.com/technical-articles/what-is-an-fpga-introduction-to-
programmable-logic-fpga-vs-microcontroller/
7) https://www.tutorialspoint.com/vlsi_design/vlsi_design_vhdl_introduction.htm#:~:text=VH
DL%20stands%20for%20very%20high,DoD)%20under%20the%20VHSIC%20program.

108
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs
COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 3
CO2 3 1 2 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 3 - - - 1 - - - 2 2 3
Avg 3 1.6 1.6 2.4 2.2 - - - 1 - - - 1.8 1.6 3

TIEE3022 MEMS AND NEMS LT P C

2023

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the diverse technological and functional approaches of MEMS/NEMS
and applications.
 To understand the microstructures and fabrication methods.
 To provide an insight of micro and nano sensors, actuators.
 To emphasis the need for NEMS technology.
 To update the ongoing trends and real time applications of MEMS and NEMS
technology.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEMS and NEMS 6

Overview of Micro electro mechanical systems and Nano Electro mechanical systems, devices and
technologies, Laws of scaling- Materials for MEMS and NEMS - Applications of MEMS and
NEMS.

UNIT II MICRO-MACHINING AND MICROFABRICATION TECHNIQUES 6

Photolithography- Micro manufacturing, Bulk micro machining, surface micro machining, LIGA.

UNIT III MICRO SENSORS AND MICRO ACTUATORS 6

Micromachining : Capactive Sensors- Piezoresistive Sensors- Piezoelectric actuators.

UNIT IV NEMS TECHNOLOGY 6

Atomic scale precision engineering- Nano Fabrication techniques – NEMS for sensors and
actuators.

UNIT V MEMS and NEMS APPLICATION 6

Bio MEMS- Optical NEMS- Micro motors- Smart Sensors - Recent trends in MEMS and NEMS.

30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENTS: 30 PERIODS

1. Laboratory experiment: Simulation of MEMS sensors and actuators using Multi physics tool
a) Simulation of a typical piezo resistive sensor
b) Simulation of a typical Piezoelectric actuator
c) Simulation study of a bio sensor
109
 d) Simulation study of a micro motor
2. Assignment: Role of MEMS AND NEMS devices for Industry Standard 5.0.
3. Mini project : Design and analysis of any MEMS/NEMS device using multi physics tool.

TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will have the ability to
CO1: Explain the material properties and the significance of MEMS and NEMS for industrial
automation.
CO2: Demonstrate knowledge delivery on micromachining and micro fabrication.
CO3: Apply the fabrication mechanism for MEMS sensor and actuators.
CO4: Apply the concepts of MEMS and NEMS to models ,simulate and process the sensors and
actuators.
CO5: Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
MEMS and NEMS technology.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2011, 2 nd Edition.
2. Tai-.Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems: design , manufacture, and Nanoscale”- 2nd Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey, 2008.
3. Lyshevski, S.E. “ Nano- and Micro-Electromechanical Systems: Fundamentals of Nano-and
Microengineering “ (2nd ed.). CRC Press,2005.
4. Julian W Gardner and Vijay K Varadan, “ Microsensors, MEMS and Smart Devices”, John Wiley
and Sons Ltd, 2001, 1st Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. Marc F madou“ Fundamentals of micro fabrication” CRC Press 2002 2nd Edition Marc Madou.
2. M.H.Bao “Micromechanical transducers :Pressure sensors, accelerometers and
gyroscopes”,Elsevier, Newyork, 16 Oct 2000, 1st Edition.
3. Maluf, Nadim “An introduction to Micro Electro-mechanical Systems Engineering “AR Tech
house, Boston, June 30 2004, 2nd Edition.
4. Mohamed Gad – el – Hak “MEMS Handbook” Edited CRC Press 2001, 1 st Edition.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://www.academia.edu/Lectures_on_MEMS_and_MICROSYSTEMS_DESIGN_AND_M
ANUFACTURE
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses
3. https://www.iitk.ac.in/me/mems-fabrication
4. http://mems.iiti.ac.in/
5. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ee36/preview

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO2 2 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 2
CO3 2 2 2 1 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 1 - - - 2 1 2
Avg 2.4 1.8 2 1.8 2.4 - - - 1 - - - 1.6 2 2.4

110
TIEE3023 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEM DESIGN L T PC
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concept of analyzing discrete time signals & systems in the time and
frequency domain through mathematical representation.
 To study the various time to frequency domain transformation techniques.
 To Understand the computation algorithmic steps for Fourier Transform.
 To study about filters and their design for digital implementation.
 To introduce the programmable digital signal processor & its application.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Classification of systems: Continuous, discrete, linear, causal, stable, dynamic, recursive, time
variance; classification of signals: continuous and discrete, energy and power; mathematical
representation of signals; spectral density; sampling techniques, quantization, quantization error,
Nyquist rate, aliasing effect. Digital signal representation.

UNIT II DISCRETE TIME SYSTEM ANALYSIS 6

Z-transform and its properties, inverse z-transforms; difference equation – Solution by z-transform,
application to discrete systems - Stability analysis, frequency response – Convolution –
Introduction to Fourier Transform– Discrete time Fourier transform.

UNIT III DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM & COMPUTATION 6

DFT properties, magnitude and phase representation - Computation of DFT using FFT algorithm –
DIT & DIF - FFT using radix 2 – Butterfly structure.

UNIT IV DESIGN OF DIGITAL FILTERS 6

FIR & IIR filter realization – Parallel & cascade forms. FIR design: Windowing Techniques – Need
and choice of windows – Linear phase characteristics. IIR design: Analog filter design - Butterworth
and Chebyshev approximations; digital design using impulse invariant and bilinear transformation -
Warping, prewarping -Frequency transformation.

UNIT V DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 6

Introduction – Architecture of one DSP processor for motor control – Features – Addressing
Formats– Functional modes - Introduction to Commercial Processors
30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENTS: 30 PERIODS

1. Laboratory exercise : Use any DSP processor/MATLAB/open source platform to give

hands on training on basic concepts of Digital Signal Processing
a) To determine impulse and step response of two vectors
b) To perform convolution between two vectors .
c) To compute DFT and IDFT of a given sequence.
d) To perform linear convolution of two sequence using DFT
e) Design and Implementation of FIR Filter
f) Design and Implementation of IIR Filter
g) To determine z-transform from the given transfer function and its ROC
2. Assignment : Implementation of FIR/IIR filter with FPGA.
3. DSP processors based Mini project.
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

111
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will have the ability to
CO1: Explain the concepts of digital signal processing
CO2: Illustrate the system representation using transforms
CO3: Learn the transformation techniques for time to frequency conversion
CO4: Design suitable digital FIR, IIR algorithm for the given specification
CO5: Use digital signal processor for application development

TEXTBOOKS:
1. J.G. Proakis and D.G. Manolakis, ‘Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and
Applications’, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 4th Edition 2007.
2. Robert J.Schilling & Sandra L.Harris ,’ Introduction to Digital Signal Processing using
MATLAB’, Cengage Learning, 2nd Edition 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Emmanuel C Ifeachor and Barrie W Jervis ,”Digital Signal Processing – A Practical approach”
Pearson Education, Second edition, 2002.
2. Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer and John R. Buck, ‘Discrete – Time Signal Processing’,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2nd Edition 2012.
3. SenM.kuo, Woonseng…s.gan, “Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Implementations &
Applications, Pearson, 1st Edition 2004.
4. S.K. Mitra, ‘Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach’, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 4th Edition 2013.
5. B. Venkataramani, M. Bhaskar, ‘Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Programming and
Applications’, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003, 1st Edition.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117102060
2. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/digital_signal_processing/index.htm
3. https://www.elprocus.com/digital-signal-processor/
4. https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/computer-science/digital-signal-processing-
algorithm#:~:text=Digital%20signal%20processing%20algorithms%20are,known%20as%20
operations%20or%20ops.
5. https://www.electronicshub.org/introduction-to-fpga/

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 - - - 1 - - - 2 2 3
Avg 2.4 3 2.8 2.4 2 - - - 1 - - - 1.8 2.2 2

112
 ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY

TIEE3024 DESIGN OF MOTOR AND POWER CONVERTERS FOR LTPC

ELECTRIC VEHICLES 2023

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To review the drive cycles and requirements of EVs
 To know the working of motors used in Electric Vehicle
 To analyze and model the buck/boost converter operation and to design the same
 To learn the simulation basics of control systems
 To derive transfer functions for DC-DC converters

UNIT I ELECTRIC VEHICLE DYNAMICS 6

Standard drive cycles-Dynamics of Electric Vehicles-Tractive force-Maximum speed, torque, power,
energy requirements of EVs.

UNIT II MOTORS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES 6

Introduction – Speed And Torque control of above and below rated speed-Speed control of EV in the
constant power region of electric motors. DC Motors, Induction Motor, Permanent Magnet
Synchronous Motors (PMSM), Brushless DC Motors, Switched Reluctance Motors (SRMs).
Synchronous Reluctance Machines-Choice of electric machines for EVs.

UNIT III BASICS OF SIMULATION IN CONTROL SYSTEMS 6

Transfer Function-How to build transfer function, identify Poles, zeros, draw time response plots, bode
plot (Bode Plots for Multiplication Factors, Constant, Single and Double Integration Functions, Single
and Double Differentiation Functions, Single Pole and Single Zero Functions, RHP Pole and RHP
Zero Functions), state space modelling-transfer function from state space Model.

UNIT IV MODELING OF DC-DC CONVERTERS 6

Overview of PWM Converter Modelling -Power Stage Modelling - PWM Block Modelling - Voltage
Feedback Circuit and Small-Signal Model of PWM Converter - Averaging Power Stage Dynamics -
Average Models for buck/boost Converter - Small-Signal Model of Converter Power Stage -
Frequency Response of Converter

UNIT V POWER STAGE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS OF DC – DC CONVERTERS 6

Power Stage Transfer Functions of buck-boost Converter in CCM Operation, Input-to-Output Transfer
Function, Duty Ratio-to-Output Transfer Function, Load Current-to-Output Transfer Function.
30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Simple simulation exercises of basic control systems
2. Bode plots and calculation of Gain margin and Phase margin for power stage transfer function
via simulation.
3. Design of buck converter
4. Design of boost converter
5. Simulation of buck, boost and buck boost converter-open loop (With power circuit and Transfer
function).
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS
113
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: To use appropriate electric machine for electric vehicle application
CO2: To compute transfer function with factors such as constant, integral, differential, first
order factor and second order factor (both numerators & denominators)
CO3: To compute transfer function from state models
CO4: To design buck, boost and buck-boost converter.
CO5: To compute a power stage transfer functions for DC-DC converters
CO6: To simulate DC-DC converters and to obtain gain margin and phase margin.

REFERENCES:
1. Power Electronic Converters, Teuvo Suntio, Tuomas Messo, Joonas Puukko, First Edition
2017.
2. Fundamentals of Power Electronics with MATLAB, Randall Shaffer, 2nd Edition, 2013, Lakshmi
publications
3. Feedback Control problems using MATLAB and the Control system tool box, Dean Frederick
and Joe Cho, 2000, 1st Edition, Cengage learning.
4. Handbook of Automotive Power Electronics and Motor Drives, Ali Emadi, Taylor & Francis,
2005,1st Edition.
5. Electrical Machine Fundamentals with Numerical Simulation using MATLAB/SIMULINK, Atif
Iqbal, Shaikh Moinoddin, Bhimireddy Prathap Reddy, Wiley,2021, 1st Edition.
6. Emerging Power Converters for Renewable Energy and Electric Vehicles Modeling, Design,
and Control, Md. Rabiul Islam,Md. Rakibuzzaman Shah, Mohd. Hasan Ali, CRC Press,2021,
1st Edition.
7. Iqbal Hussain, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, Second Edition” CRC
Press, Taylor & Francis Group, Third Edition 2021.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs COs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 - - - - 1 - 3 - 3 3 - 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - 3 - 3 3 3 2.6

TIEE3025 ELECTRIC VEHICLE DESIGN, MECHANICS AND CONTROL L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the basics of EV and vehicle mechanics
 To know the EV architecture
 To study the energy storage system concepts
 To derive model for batteries and to know the different types of batteries and its
charging methods
 To learn the control preliminaries for DC-DC converters.
114
UNIT I INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES 6
IC Engines, BMEP and BSFC, Vehicle Fuel Economy, Emission Control Systems, Treatment of Diesel
Exhaust Emissions.

UNIT II ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND VEHICLE MECHANICS 6

Electric Vehicles (EV), Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV), Engine ratings- Comparisons of EV with
internal combustion Engine vehicles- Fundamentals of vehicle mechanics.

UNIT III BATTERY MODELING, TYPES AND CHARGING 6

Batteries in Electric and Hybrid Vehicles - Battery Basics -Battery Parameters. Types- Lead Acid
Battery - Nickel-Cadmium Battery - Nickel-Metal-Hydride (NiMH) Battery - Li-Ion Battery - Li-Polymer
Battery, Zinc-Air Battery, Sodium-Sulphur Battery, Sodium-Metal-Chloride, Research and
Development for Advanced Batteries. Battery Modelling, Electric Circuit Models. Battery Pack
Management, Battery Charging.

UNIT IV CONTROL PRELIMINARIES 6

Control Design Preliminaries - Introduction - Transfer Functions – Bode plot analysis for First order
and second order systems - Stability - Transient Performance- Power transfer function for boost
converter - Gain margin and Phase margin study-open loop mode.

UNIT V CONTROL OF AC MACHINES 6

Introduction- Reference frame theory, basics-modeling of induction and synchronous machine in
various frames-Vector control- Direct torque control.
30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Develop a model that could estimate Soc and SoH of Li-Ion Battery.
2. Modelling and thermal analysis of Li-Ion Battery.
3. Simulation of boost converter and calculating gain and phase margin from the transfer
function.
4. Simulation of vector control of induction motor
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: To describe the concepts related with EV, HEV and to compare the same with internal
combustion engine vehicles
CO2: To find gain margin & phase margin for various types of transfer functions of
boost converter
CO3: To demonstrate the Control of A C Machines
CO4: To explain the concepts related with batteries and parameters of battery
CO5: To module the battery and to study the research and development for batteries

REFERENCES:
1. Electric and Hybrid Vehicles, Design Fundamentals, Third Edition, Iqbal Husain, CRC Press,
2021.
2. Power Electronic Converters,: Dynamics and Control in Conventional and Renewable Energy
Applications, Teuvo Suntio, Tuomas Messo, Joonas Puukko, 1 st Edition, Wiley - VCH.
3. Ali Emadi, Mehrdad Ehsani, John M.Miller, “Vehicular Electric Power Systems”, Special Indian
Edition, Marcel dekker, Inc 2003, 1st Edition.
4. C.C. Chan and K.T. Chau, 'Modern Electric Vehicle Technology', OXFORD University Press,

115
 2001, 1st Edition.
5. Wie Liu, “Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control”, Second Edition, John Wiley &
Sons, 2017, 2nd Edition.
6. Dynamic Simulation of Electric Machinery using MATLAB, Chee Mun Ong, Prentice Hall,1997,
1st Edition.
7. Electrical Machine Fundamentals with Numerical Simulation using MATLAB/ SIMULINK, Atif
Iqbal, Shaikh Moinoddin, Bhimireddy Prathap Reddy, Wiley, 2021, 1 st Edition.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 - 2 3 - 3
CO2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 - 2 3 - 3
CO3 3 - - - - - 3 - 1 2 - 2 3 - 3
CO4 3 - - - - - 3 - 1 2 - 2 3 - 3
CO5 3 - - - - - 3 - 1 2 - 2 3 2 3
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 - 3 - 1 2.3 - 2 3 2.5 3

TIEE3026 DESIGN OF ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the charging station and standards
 To learn the concepts of power converters in charging
 To find the charging scheme in renewable based EV charging
 To demonstrate the wireless power transfer technique
 To design & simulate power factor correction circuits

UNIT I CHARGING STATIONS AND STANDARDS 6

Introduction-Charging technologies- Conductive charging, EV charging infrastructure, International
standards and regulations - Inductive charging, need for inductive charging of EV, Modes and
operating principle, Static and dynamic charging, Bidirectional power flow, International standards and
regulations

UNIT II POWER ELECTRONICS FOR EV CHARGING 6

Layouts of EV Battery Charging Systems-AC charging-DC charging systems- Power Electronic
Converters for EV Battery Charging- AC–DC converter with boost PFC circuit, with bridge and without
bridge circuit - Bidirectional DC–DC Converters- Non-isolated DC–DC bidirectional converter
topologies- Half-bridge bidirectional converter.

UNIT III EV CHARGING USING RENEWABLE AND STORAGE SYSTEMS 6

Introduction- - EV charger topologies , EV charging/discharging strategies - Integration of EV
charging-home solar PV system , Operation modes of EVC-HSP system , Control strategy of EVC-
HSP system - fast-charging infrastructure with solar PV and energy storage.

116
UNIT IV WIRELESS POWER TRANSFER 6
Introduction - Inductive, Magnetic Resonance, Capacitive types. Wireless Chargers for Electric
Vehicles - Types of Electric Vehicles - Battery Technology in EVs -Charging Modes in EVs - Benefits
of WPT. - WPT Operation Modes - Standards for EV Wireless Chargers, SAE J2954, IEC 61980. ISO
19363

UNIT V POWER FACTOR CORRECTION IN CHARGING SYSTEM 6

Need for power factor correction- Boost Converter for Power Factor Correction, Sizing the Boost
Inductor, Average Currents in the Rectifier and calculation of power losses-
30 PERIODS
LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS
1. Simulation and analysis for bi-directional charging V2G and G2V.
2. Design and demonstrate solar PV based EV charging station.
3. Simulate and infer wireless power charging station for EV charging.
4. Simulation of boost converter based power factor correction.
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: To illustrate various charging techniques and to know charging standards and regulations.
CO2: To demonstrate the working o DC-DC converters used for charging systems and principles
CO3: To illustrate the advantages of renewable system based charging systems
CO4: To demonstrate the principles of wireless power transfer.
CO5: To analyze the standards for wireless charging
CO6: To design and simulate boost converter based power factor correction.

REFERENCES:
1. Mobile Electric Vehicles Online Charging and Discharging, Miao Wang Ran Zhang Xuemin
(Sherman) Shen, Springer 2016, 1st Edition.
2. Alicia Triviño-Cabrera, José M. González-González, José A. Aguado, Wireless Power
Transferor Electric Vehicles: Foundations and Design Approach, Springer Publisher 1 st Edition.
2020.
3. Nil Patel, Akash Kumar Bhoi, Sanjeevikumar Padmanaban, Jens Bo Holm-Nielsen, Electric
Vehicles Modern Technologies and Trends. Springer Publisher 1st Edition, 2021.
4. Cable Based and Wireless Charging Systems for Electric Vehicles, Technology and control,
management and grid integration, Rajiv Singh, Sanjeevikumar Padmanaban, Sanjeet Dwivedi,
Marta Molinas and Frede Blaabjerg, IET 2021, 1st Edition.
5. Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles, James D Halderman, Pearson, 2022, 1st Edition.
6. Handbook of Automotive Power Electronics and Motor Drives, Ali Emadi, Taylor & Francis,
2005.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs
POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - 3 - 3 3 -- -
CO2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 - - - - 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - 2 - 1 3 3 3
CO5 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 2 - 3 - 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 2 - 2.75 - 2.25 3 3 3

117
TIEE3027 TESTING OF ELECTRIC VEHICLES L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know various standardization procedures
 To learn the testing procedures for EV & HEV components
 To know the functional safety and EMC
 To realize the effect of EMC in EVs
 To study the effect of EMI in motor drives and in DC-DC converter system

UNIT I EV STANDARDIZATION 6
Introduction - Current status of standardization of electric vehicles, electric Vehicles and
Standardization - Standardization Bodies Active in the Field – Standardization activities in countries
like Japan. The International Electro Technical Commission - Standardization of Vehicle Components.

UNIT II TESTING OF ELECTRIC MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS FOR 6

ELECTRIC AND HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES
Test Procedure Using M-G Set, electric motor, controller, application of Test Procedure, Analysis of
Test Items for the Type Test - Motor Test and Controller Test (Controller Only). - Test Procedure
Using Eddy Current Type Engine Dynamometer, Test Strategy, Test Procedure, Discussion on Test
Procedure. Test Procedure Using AC Dynamometer.

UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF FUNCTIONAL SAFETY AND EMC 6

Functional safety life cycle - Fault tree analysis - Hazard and risk assessment – software
development - Process models - Development assessments - Configuration management - Reliability
- Reliability block diagrams and redundancy - Functional safety and EMC - Functional safety and
quality - Standards - Functional safety of autonomous vehicles.

UNIT IV EMC IN ELECTRIC VEHICLES 6

Introduction - EMC Problems of EVs, EMC Problems of Motor Drive, EMC Problems of DC-DC
Converter System, EMC Problems of Wireless Charging System, EMC Problem of Vehicle Controller,
EMC Problems of Battery Management System, Vehicle EMC Requirements-

UNIT V EMI IN MOTOR DRIVE AND DC-DC CONVERTER SYSTEM 6

Overview -EMI Mechanism of Motor Drive System, Conducted Emission Test of Motor Drive System,
IGBT EMI Source, EMI Coupling Path, EMI Modelling of Motor Drive System. EMI in DC-DC
Converter, EMI Source, The Conducted Emission High-Frequency, Equivalent Circuit of DC-DC
Converter System, EMI Coupling Path

30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Design and simulate motor controller for hybrid electric vehicle applications
2. Simulation of EMC analysis for Wireless power transfer EV charging.
3. Design and simulation of EMI filter
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

118
CO1: To describe the status and other details of standardization of EVs
CO2: To illustrate the testing protocols for EVs and HEV components
CO3: To analyze the safety cycle and need for functions safety for EVs
CO4: To analyze the problems related with EMC for EV components.
CO5: To evaluate the EMI in motor drive and DC-DC converter system.

REFERENCES:

1. Handbook of Automotive Power Electronics and Motor Drives, Ali Emadi, Taylor & Francis,
2005, 1st Edition.
2. Electromagnetic Compatibility of Electric Vehicle, Li Zhai, Springer 2021, 1st Edition.
3. EMC and Functional Safety of Automotive Electronics, Kai Borgeest, IET 2018, 1 st Edition.
4. EMI/EMC Computational Modeling Handbook, Druce Archam beault, colin branch, Omar
M.Ramachi ,Springer 2012, 2nd Edition.
5. Automotive EMC, Mark Steffika, Springer 2013, 1st Edition.
6. Electric Vehicle Systems Architecture and Standardization Needs, Reports of the PPP
European Green Vehicles Initiative, Beate Müller, Gereon Meyer, Springer 2015, 1 st Edition.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs
POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 1 1 - - - 2 - - - - - 3 - 2
CO2 3 1 1 - - - 1 - - - - - 3 - 2
CO3 3 1 1 - - - 2 - - - - - 3 - 2
CO4 3 1 1 - - - 1 - - - - - 3 - 2
CO5 3 1 1 - - - 2 - - - - - 3 - 3
Avg 3 1 1 - - - 1.8 2 3 2 3 3 2.3

TIEE3028 GRID INTEGRATION OF ELECTRIC VEHICLES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basic details of V2G
 To study the benefits & challenges of V2G
 To learn EV & V2G on the smart grids renewable energy systems
 To know the grid integration

UNIT I DEFINITION, And STATUS Of V2G (7+2 Skill) 9

Defining Vehicle to Grid (V2G) - History and Development of V2G. Incorporating V2G to the EV,
Auditing and Metering, V2G in Practice , V2G - Power Markets and Applications . Electricity Markets
and V2G Suitability , Long-Term Storage, Renewable Energy, and Other Grid Applications , Beyond
the Grid: Other Concepts Related to V2G.

UNIT II BENEFITS AND CHALLENGES OF V2G (7+2 Skill) 9

Benefits of V2G, Technical Benefits: Storage Superiority and Grid Efficiency, Economic Benefits: EV
Owners and Societal Savings, Environment and Health Benefits: Sustainability in Electricity and

119
Transport, Other Benefits.

UNIT III CHALLENGES TO V2G (7+2 Skill) 9

Technical Challenges-Battery Degradation, Charger Efficiency, Aggregation and Communication,
V2G in a Digital Society. The Economic and Business Challenges to V2G - Evaluating V2G Costs
and Revenues , EV Costs and Benefits , Adding V2G Costs and Benefits , Additional V2G Costs , The
Evolving Nature of V2G Costs and Benefits. Regulatory and Political Challenges to V2G , V2G and
Regulatory Frameworks , Market Design Challenges. Other V2G Regulatory and Legal Challenges.

UNIT IV IMPACT OF EV AND V2G ON THE SMART GRID AND RENEWABLE ENERGY
SYSTEMS (7+2 Skill) 9
Introduction - Types of Electric Vehicles - Motor Vehicle Ownership and EV Migration - Impact of
Estimated EVs on Electrical Network - Impact on Drivers and the Smart Grid - Standardization and
Plug-and-Play - IEC 61850 Communication Standard and IEC 61850-7-420 Extension.

UNIT V GRID INTEGRATION AND MANAGEMENT OF EVS (7+2 Skill) 9

Introduction - Machine to Machine (M2M) in distributed energy management systems - M2M
communication for EVs - M2M communication architecture (3GPP) - Electric vehicle data logging -
Scalability of electric vehicles -M2M communication with scheduling.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content Preparation / Quiz/
Surprise Test / etc) 10
1. Simulation of connecting three phase inverter to the grid.
2. Simulate and analyse the power quality issues of V2G systems
3. Design and simulate battery management system for smart grid with distributed generation.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1 : Explain the concepts related with V2G
CO2 : Study the grid connection of 3 phase Q inverter
CO3 : Explain the technical, economics. business, regulatory & political challenges related
with V2G
CO4 : Demonstrate the impact of EV and V2G on smart grid and renewable energy system
CO5 : Explain the concept of grid integration and management of EVs.

REFERENCES:
1. Advanced Electric Drive Vehicles, Ali Emadi, CRC Press 2017, 1 st Edition.
2. Plug In Electric Vehicles in Smart Grids, Charging Strategies, Sumedha Rajakaruna , Farhad
Shahnia and Arindam Ghosh,Springer,2015, 1st Edition.
3. ICT for Electric Vehicle Integration with the Smart Grid, Nand Kishor 1; Jesus Fraile-Ardanuy,
IET 2020, 1st Edition.
4. Vehicle-to-Grid: Linking Electric Vehicles to the Smart Grid, Junwei Lu and Jahangir Hossain,
IET 2015, 1st Edition.
5. Lance Noel · Gerardo Zarazua de Rubens Johannes Kester · Benjamin K. Sovacool, Vehicle-
to-Grid A Sociotechnical Transition Beyond Electric Mobility, 2019, 1st Edition.

120
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 - - - - - 2 1 - 2 - - 3 3 1

CO2 3 3 - - 3 - 2 1 - 2 - - 3 - -

CO3 3 - - - - - 2 1 - 2 - - 3 - -
CO4 3 - - - - - 2 1 - 2 - - 3 - 2
CO5 3 - - - - - 2 1 - 2 - - 3 - 3

Avg 3 3 - - 3 - 2 1 - 2 - - 3 3 1.2

TIEE3029 INTELLIGENT CONTROL OF ELECTRIC VEHICLES L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To design and drive the mathematical model of a BLDC motor and its characteristics
 To learn the different control schemes for BLDC motor
 To study the basics of fuzzy logic
 To study the FPGA & VHDL basics
 To implement fuzzy logic control of BLDC motor in real time

UNIT I MATHEMATICAL MODEL AND CHARACTERISTICS ANALYSIS OF THE 6

BLDC MOTOR

Structure and Drive Modes - Basic Structure, General Design Method, Drive Modes. Mathematical
Model, Differential Equations, Transfer Functions, State-Space Equations. Characteristics Analysis,
Starting Characteristics, Steady-State Operation, Dynamic Characteristics, Load Matching
Commutation Transients
UNIT II SPEED CONTROL FOR ELECTRIC DRIVES 6
Introduction -PID Control Principle, Anti windup Controller, Intelligent Controller. Vector Control.
Control applied to BLDC motor-.

UNIT III FUZZY LOGIC 6

Membership functions: features, fuzzification, methods of membership value assignments
Defuzzification: lambda cuts - methods - fuzzy arithmetic and fuzzy measures: fuzzy arithmetic -
extension principle - fuzzy measures - measures of fuzziness -fuzzy integrals - fuzzy rule base and
approximate reasoning : truth values and tables, fuzzy propositions, formation of rules
decomposition of rules, aggregation of fuzzy rules, fuzzy reasoning-fuzzy inference systems,
overview of fuzzy expert system-fuzzy decision making..

UNIT IV FPGA AND VHDL BASICS 6

Introduction – FPGA Architecture-Advantages-Review of FPGA family processors- Spartan 3,
Spartan 6 and Spartan 7. VHDL Basics- Fundamentals-Instruction set-data type-conditional
statements- programs like arithmetic, sorting, PWM generation, Speed detection.
121
UNIT V REAL TIME IMPLEMENTATION 6
Inverter design, identifying rotor position via hall effect sensors, open loop and fuzzy logic control of
48 V BLDC motor using FPGA. .
30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT: 30 PERIODS

1. Design and simulate speed controller for induction motors in EV for both dynamic and steady
state performance
2. Simulate a fuzzy logic controller based energy storage system for EV.
3. Fuzzy logic control of BLDC motor using FPGA in real time
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: To design the mathematical model of a BLDC motor and to discuss about its characteristics
CO2: To demonstrate the PID control, ant windup controller, Intelligent Controller and Vector
Control. Control applied to BLDC motor.
CO3: To illustrate the basics of fuzzy logic system
CO4: To describe the basics of VHDL & FPGA applied to control of EVs.
CO5: To design and implement of fuzzy logic control scheme for BLDC motor using FPGA in real
time.

REFERENCES:
1. Electric Powertrain Energy Systems, Power Electronics and Drives for Hybrid, Electric and
Fuel Cell Vehicles, John G. Hayes, G. Abas Goodarzi, Wiley 1st Edition 2018.
2. VHDL Primer, A (3rd Edition), Jayaram Bhasker, Prentice Hall, 1st Edition 2015.
3. Iqbal Hussain, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, Third Edition” CRC
Press, Taylor & Francis Group, 2021, 1st Edition.
4. Chang-liang, Permanent Magnet Brushless DC Motor Drives and Controls, Xia Wiley 2012,
st
1 Edition.
5. M.N. Cirstea, A. Dinu, J.G. Khor,M. McCormick, Neural and Fuzzy Logic Control of Drives
and Power Systems, Newnes publications, 1st Edition, 2002.
6. Wei Liu, Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control, Wiley 2017, 2 nd Edition
7. Electric and Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle Networks Optimization and Control, Emanuele
Crisostomi • Robert Shorten, Sonja Stüdli • Fabian Wirth, CRC Press, 1st Edition. 2018.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs
POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 2 2 - - - 3 - 2 - 3 3 3 -

CO2 3 3 2 2 - - - 3 - 2 - 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 2 - 3 3 2 3

CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - 2 - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - 2 - 3 3 3 3

Avg 3 3 2.6 2.6 3 - - 3 - 2 - 3 3 2.8 2.4

122
 ADVANCED CONTROL

TIEE3030 PROCESS MODELING AND SIMULATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the important of mathematical models for Industrial processes
 To acquaint students with different forms of mathematical models.
 To develop and simulate mathematical models for different Industrial processes.
 To apply Mathematical tools while developing mathematical models.
 To analyze the graphical response of developed mathematical models.

UNIT I GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF MODELLING (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction to mathematical modeling; Advantages and limitations of models and applications of
process models of stand-alone unit operations and unit processes; Classification of models:
Linear vs Nonlinear, Lumped parameter vs. Distributed parameter; Static vs. Dynamic,
Continuous vs. Discrete; Numerical Methods: Iterative convergence methods, Numerical
integration of ODE- IVP and ODEBVP

UNIT II MODELLING OF DISTRIBUTED PROCESSES (7+2 SKILL) 9

Steady state models giving rise to differential algebraic equation (DAE) systems; Rate
basedApproaches for staged processes; Modeling of differential contactors – distributed
parameter models of packed beds; Packed bed reactors; Modeling of reactive separation
processes; Review of solution strategies for Differential Algebraic Equations (DAEs), Partial
Differential Equations (PDEs), and available numerical software libraries.

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS MODELLING (7+2 SKILL) 9

Concept of degree of freedom analysis: System and its subsystem, System interaction, Degree
of freedomin a system e.g. Heat exchanger, Equilibrium still, Reversal of information flow,
Design variable selectionalgorithm, Information flow through subsystems, Structural effects of
design variable selection, PersistentRecycle.

UNIT IV MODELLING OF INDUSTRIAL PROCESSES (7+2 SKILL) 9

Simple examples of process models; Models giving rise to nonlinear algebraic equation (NAE)
systems, -steady state models of flash vessels, equilibrium staged processes distillation columns,
absorbers,strippers, CSTR, heat exchangers, etc.; Review of solution procedures and available
numerical softwarelibraries

UNIT V SIMULATION OF MATHEMATICAL MODELLING (7+2 SKILL) 9

Simulation and their approaches, Modular, Sequential, Simultaneous and Equation solving
approach, Simulation softwares and their applications, Review of solution techniques and
available numerical software libraries.- Case Studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content 10
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)
1. Developing steady state /Dynamic mathematical model of different unit processes
(ODE or PDE)
2. Simulation of steady state/ dynamic models using appropriate software
3. Open loop study based on the developed mathematical model.
4. Development and simulation of unsteady state models for simple processes.
123
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Will be able to understand different methods of developing models for industrial
processes.
CO2 Able to build mathematical models by applying relevant mathematics.
CO3 Able to implement mathematical models using relevant software.
CO4 Effectively perform analysis and subsequent conclusion for the developed mathematical
models.
CO5 Able to interpret the results obtained from the mathematical model in terms of original
real world problem
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Denn M. M.,"Process Modeling", Longman, 1986, 1st Edition.
2. Aris R.,"Mathematical Modeling,A Chemical Engineering Perspective (Process System
Engineering)", Academic Press, 1999, Volume 1.

REFERENCES:
1 .Luyben W.L., “Process Modeling, Simulation, and Control for Chemical Engineering”, McGraw
Hill, 2nd Edition, 1990.
2. D. F. Rudd and C. C. Watson, “ Strategy of Process Engineering”, Wiley international, 1st
Edition, 1968.
3. M.M. Denn, “Process Modelling”, Wiley, New York, 1st Edition, 1986.
4. A. K. Jana, “Chemical Process Modelling and Computer Simulation”, PHI,1st Edition, 2011.
5. C.D. Holland, “Fundamentals of Modelling Separation Processes”, Prentice Hall, , 1 st Edition,
1975.
6. HussainAsghar, “Chemical Process Simulation”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, , 1st Edition,
1986.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/103/107/103107096/
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103101111
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111107105
https://www.academia.edu/37228967/Process_Modeling_Simulation_and_Control_for_Chemic
al_Engineers
MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs
COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 1 - - 2 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2 - - 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO3 1 - 2 3 - 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO4 1 - 3 - - 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO5 1 2 - 3 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
Avg. 3 1 - - 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

124
TIEE3031 COMPUTER CONTROL OF PROCESSES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To represent the linear time invariant System in discrete State Space form
 To analyze the controllability, observability and stability of a Discrete time System.
 To estimate model parameters from input/output measurements
 To Design Digital Controllers
 To Design Multi-loop and Multivariable Controllers for multivariable system

UNIT I DISCRETE STATE-VARIABLE TECHNIQUE (7+2 SKILL) 9

State equation of discrete data system with sample and hold – State transition equation –
Methods of computing the state transition matrix – Decomposition of discrete data transfer
functions – State diagrams of discrete data systems – System with zero-order hold –
Controllability and observability of linear time invariant discrete data system–Stability tests of
discrete-data system.

UNIT II SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION (7+2 SKILL) 9

Identification of Non-Parametric Input-Output Models: -Transient analysis–Frequency analysis–
Correlation analysis– Spectral analysis – Identification of Parametric Input-Output Models: -
Least Squares Method – Recursive Least Square Method.

UNIT III DIGITAL CONTROLLER DESIGN (7+2 SKILL) 9

Review of z-transform – Modified of z-transform – Pulse transfer function – Digital PID controller
– Dead-beat controller and Dahlin’s controller – Kalman’s algorithm, Pole Placement Controller

UNIT IV MULTI-LOOP REGULATORY CONTROL (7+2 SKILL) 9

Multi-loop Control - Introduction – Process Interaction – Pairing of Inputs and Outputs -The
Relative Gain Array (RGA) – Properties and Application of RGA - Multi-loop PID Controller –
Biggest Log Modulus Tuning Method – De-coupler.

UNIT V MULTIVARIABLE REGULATORY CONTROL (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction to Multivariable control –Multivariable PID Controller – Multivariable Dynamic Matrix
Controller – Case Studies: - Distillation Column, CSTR and Four-tank system.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/ Assignment/ Content 10
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)
1. Calculate the RGA to determine the recommended pairing between controlled and
manipulated variables for any system.
2. Seminar on LS, RLS methods.
3. Design of DMC for distillation Column, CSTR and Four-tank systemin MATLAB.
4. Design a Multi-loop & Multivariable controller for MIMO system.
5. Design a model for any industrial process using parametric & non-parametric system.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Develop mathematical models for discrete time systems using state variable techniques
and analyze the stability of the systems. L4
CO2 Construct models from input-output data by least square and recursive least square
125
 method. L5
CO3 Ability to design different digital controllers to satisfy the required criterion. L5
CO4 Design a multi-loop controller and multivariable controller for multi-variable systems. L5
CO5 Ability to design multivariable dynamic matrix controller for industrial processes. L5

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stephanopoulos, G., “Chemical Process Control -An Introduction to Theory and Practice”,
Prentice Hall of India, 1st Edition, 2015.
2. Sigurd Skogestad, Ian Postlethwaite, “Multivariable Feedback Control: Analysis and
Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2005, 2nd Edition.

REFERENCE
1. Thomas E. Marlin, Process Control – Designing Processes and Control systems for Dynamic
Performance, Mc-Graw-Hill,2000, 2nd Edition.
2. Gopal, M., “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 4th Edition, 2017.
3. P. Albertos and A. Sala, “Multivariable Control Systems An Engineering Approach”, Springer
Verlag, 1st Edition, 2004
4. Bequette, B.W., “Process Control Modeling, Design and Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India,
1st Edition, 2003.
5. Dale E. Seborg, Duncan A. Mellichamp, Thomas F. Edgar, “Process Dynamics and Control”,
Wiley John and Sons, 4th Edition, 2016.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103104050
https://www.mathworks.com/matlabcentral/mlc-
downloads/downloads/submissions/10816/versions/1/previews/Mimotools/rga.m/index.html
https://in.mathworks.com/help/ident/
https://ctms.engin.umich.edu/CTMS/index.php?example=Introduction&section=ControlDigital

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
Avg. 3 3 3 2.8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

126
TIEE3032 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To elaborate the concept of estimating the state variables of a system using state
estimation algorithms.
 To elaborate the concept of estimating the parameters of the Input-output models using
parameter estimation algorithms.
 To make the student understand the various closed loop system identification techniques.
 To make the student understand the various closed loop system identification techniques.
 To provide the background on the practical aspects of conducting experiments for real time
system identification.

UNIT I NON PARAMETRIC METHODS (7+2 SKILL) 9

Nonparametric methods: Transient analysis - frequency analysis - Correlation analysis -
Spectral analysis.

UNIT II PARAMETRIC METHODS (7+2 SKILL) 9

Parametric model structures: ARX, ARMAX, OE, BJ models - The Least square estimate -
Best linear unbiased estimation under linear constraints - Updating the Parameter estimates
for linear regression models - Prediction error methods: Description of Prediction error
methods - Optimal Prediction – Relationships between prediction error methods and other
identification methods - theoretical analysis. Instrumental variable methods: Description of
Instrumental variable methods - Theoretical analysis - covariance matrix of IV estimates -
Comparison of optimal IV and prediction error methods.

UNIT III RECURSIVE IDENTIFICATION METHODS (7+2 SKILL) 9

The recursive least squares method - Recursive Instrumental variable method-the recursive
prediction error method-model validation and model structure determination. Identification of
systems operating in closed loop: Identifiability considerations - Direct identification - Indirect
identification - Joint input – Output identification.

UNIT IV CLOSED- LOOP IDENTIFICATION (7+2 SKILL) 9

Identification of systems operating in closed loop: direct identification and indirect identification
– Subspace Identification methods: classical and innovation forms – Relay feedback
identification of stable processes.

UNIT V NONLINEAR SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION (7+2 SKILL) 9

Modeling of nonlinear systems using ANN- NARX & NARMAX - Training Feed-forward and
Recurrent Neural Networks – TSK model – Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference System (ANFIS) -
Introduction to Support Vector Regression.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content 10
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)
1. Familiarization of various system identification methods in MATLAB.
2. Seminar on ANFIS
3. Exploration of other advanced system identification methods.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Ability to design and implement state estimation schemes. L5
CO2 Ability to develop various models (Linear & Nonlinear) from the experimental data. L5
CO3 Be able to choose a suitable model and parameter estimation algorithm for the
127
 identification of systems. L3
CO4 Be able to illustrate verification and validation of identified model. L3
CO5 Ability to develop the model for prediction and simulation purposes using suitable
control schemes. L5

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Lennart Ljung, “System Identification: Theory for the user”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1999.
2. Dan Simon, “Optimal State Estimation Kalman, H-infinity and Non-linear Approaches”, John
Wiley and Sons, 2006,
3. Tangirala, A.K., “Principles of System Identification: Theory and Practice”, CRC Press,
2014, 1st Edition.
REFERENCE
1. Cortes, C., and Vapnik, V., “Support-Vector Networks, Machine Learning”, 1995, 1 st Edition.
2. Miller, W.T., Sutton, R.S., and Webrose, P.J., “Neural Networks for Control”, MIT Press,
1996, 1st Edition.
3. Van der Heijden, F., Duin, R.P.W., De Ridder, D., and Tax, D.M.J., “Classification,
Parameter Estimation and State Estimation”, An Engineering Approach Using MATLAB,
John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2017, 2nd Edition.
4. Karel J. Keesman, “System Identification an Introduction”, Springer, 2011, 1st Edition.
5. Tao Liu and Furong Gao, “Industrial Process Identification and control design, Step-test and
relay-experiment-based methods”, Springer- Verlag London Ltd., 2012, 1 st Edition.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
https://in.mathworks.com/help/ident/
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103106149
https://in.mathworks.com/help/curvefit/nonparametric-fitting.html
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111102143

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
Avg. 3 2.6 2.6 2.6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

128
TIEE3033 MODEL BASED CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the Knowledge about Multivariable and Multiloop systems.
 To understand the Model predictive control schemes and its elements.
 Get exposed to state space MPC along with case studies.
 To acquire knowledge on various constrained MPC.
 To make the student understand the principles of STR, MRAC and Gain scheduling.
 To make the student design simple adaptive controllers for linear systems

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MIMO CONTROL (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction to MIMO Systems-Multivariable control-Multiloop Control-Multivariable IMC-IMCPID-
Case studies

UNIT II MODEL PREDICTIVE CONTROL SCHEMES (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction to Model Predictive Control - Model Predictive Control Elements - Generalized
Predictive Control Scheme – Multivariable Generalized Predictive Control Scheme – Multiple
Model based Model Predictive Control Scheme Case Studies

UNIT III STATE SPACE BASED MODEL PREDICTIVE CONTROL SCHEME (7+2 SKILL) 9

State Space Model Based Predictive Control Scheme - Review of Kalman Update based filters –
State Observer Based Model Predictive Control Schemes – Case Studies

UNIT IV CONSTRAINED MODEL PREDICTIVE CONTROL SCHEME (7+2 SKILL) 9

Constraints Handling: Amplitude Constraints and Rate Constraints –Constraints and Optimization
– Constrained Model Predictive Control Scheme – Case Studies.

UNIT V ADAPTIVE CONTROL SCHEME (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction to Adaptive Control-Gain Scheduling-Self tuning regulators–MARS-Adaptive Model
Predictive Control Scheme –Case Studie
TOTAL:45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content 10

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)

1 Explore various MIMO controllers presently used in industries.

2 Develop MPC, Adaptive and MIMO controllers for industrial processes.
3 Implement the controllers for MIMO systems.
4 Using software tools for practical exposures to the controllers used in industries by
undergoing training.
5 Realisation of various optimization techniques for economical operation of process.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Ability to apply engineering knowledge to understand the control schemes on MIMO
systems L3.
CO2 Ability to design controller for MIMO systemL5.

129
 CO3 Ability to analyze the control schemes available in industries L4.
CO4 Ability to design MPC, Adaptive controllers for practical engineering problems L5.
CO5 Ability to choose suitable controllers for the given problems L5.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Coleman Brosilow, Babu Joseph, “Techniques of Model-Based Control”, Prentice Hall PTR
Pub 2002, 1st Edition.
2. E. F. Camacho, C. Bordons ,“Model Predictive Control”,Springer-Verlag London Limited
2007, 2nd Edition.
3. K.J. Astrom and B. J. Wittenmark, “Adaptive Control”, Second Edition, Pearson Education
Inc., second Edition 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Serban Agachi, Zoltan K. Nagy, Mircea Vasile Cristea, and Arpad Imre-Lucaci Model
Based Control Case Studies in Process Engineering,WILEY-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co.
KGaA, Weinheim 2007.1st Edition.
2. Ridong Zhang, Anke Xue Furong Gao,“Model Predictive Control Approaches Based on the
Extended State Space Model and Extended Non-minimal State Space Model”,Springer
Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019, 1st Edition.
3. J.A. ROSSITER “Model-Based Predictive Control A Practical Approach”Taylor & Francis e-
Library, 2005, 1st edition.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103103037
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108103007
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ge01/preview
4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/127106225

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
Avg. 3 2.8 2.8 2.6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

130
TIEE3034 NON LINEAR CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge on design in state variable form
 To provide knowledge in phase plane analysis.
 To give basic knowledge in describing function analysis.
 To study the design of optimal controller.
 To study the design of optimal estimator including Kalman Filter
UNIT I STATE VARIABLE DESIGN (7+2 SKILL) 9
Introduction to state Model- effect of state Feedback- Necessary and Sufficient Condition for
Arbitrary Pole-placement- pole placement Design- design of state Observers- separation
principle- servo design: -State Feedback with integral control

UNIT II PHASE PLANE ANALYSIS (7+2 SKILL) 9

Features of linear and non-linear systems - Common physical non-linearities – Methods of
linearization Concept of phase portraits – Singular points – Limit cycles – Construction of
phaseportraits – Phase plane analysis of linear and non-linear systems – Isocline method.

UNIT III DESCRIBING FUNCTION ANALYSIS (7+2 SKILL) 9

Basic concepts, derivation of describing functions for common non-linearities – Describing

function analysis of non-linear systems – limit cycles – Stability of oscillations.

UNIT IV OPTIMAL CONTROL (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction - Time varying optimal control – LQR steady state optimal control – Solution of
Ricatti’s equation – Application examples.

UNIT V OPTIMAL ESTIMATION (7+2 SKILL) 9

Optimal estimation – KalmanBucy Filter-Solution by duality principle-Discrete systems-
Kalman Filter-Application examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/
Content Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 10
1 Design of linear quadratic regulator (LQR) control system for any application of your own
2 Familiarization of Kalman filter in MATLAB
3 Seminar on pole placement design

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Able to apply the knowledge gained on state feedback control and nonlinear control. (L3)
CO2 Ability to carryout analysis for common nonlinearities in a system. (L4)
CO3 Apply advanced control theory to practical engineering problems. (L3)
CO4 Design optimal controller. (L5)
CO5 Understand the basics and Importance of Kalman filter. (L2)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. G. J. Thaler, “Automatic Control Systems”, Jaico Publishing House 1993.
2. M.Gopal, Modern Control System Theory, New Age International Publishers, 2002, 2nd
Edition.
131
 3. K. P. Mohandas, “Modern Control Engineering”, Sanguine Technical Publishers, 2006, 1 st
Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. Ashish Tewari, ‘Modern Control Design with Matlab and Simulink’, John Wiley, New
Delhi, 2002, 1st Edition.
2. K. Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, 5th Edition, PHI, New Delhi, 2009.
3. T. Glad and L. Ljung,, “Control Theory –Multivariable and Non-Linear Methods”, Taylor
& Francis, 2002, 1st Edition.
4. D.S.Naidu, “Optimal Control Systems” First Indian Reprint, CRC Press, 2009, 1 st Edition.
5. William S Levine, “Control System Fundamentals,” The Control Handbook, CRC
Press, Tayler and Francies Group, 2011, 2nd Edition.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
https://in.mathworks.com/discovery/kalman-filter.html
https://in.mathworks.com/help/control/getstart/design-an-lqr-servo-controller-insimulink.html
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ee24/preview
http://www.nitttrc.edu.in/nptel/courses/video/101108047/lec22.pdf

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2
Avg. 2.8 2.2 2.4 2 1 1 1 2.8 1 2.8 1 1 2 2 2

132
TIEE3035 OPTIMAL CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide an exposure to different type of optimal control problems such as time- optimal,
fuel optimal, energy optimal control problems.
 To impart knowledge and skills needed to design Linear Quadratic Regulator for Time-
invariant and Time-varying Linear system (Continuous time and Discrete-time systems).
 To introduce concepts needed to design optimal controller using Dynamic Programming
Approach and H-J-B equation.
 To provide an exposure to various types of fault tolerant control schemes such as Passive
and active approaches.
 To introduce concepts needed to design optimal controller in the presence of state
constraints and time optimal controller.
UNIT I CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS AND OPTIMAL CONTROL (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction – Performance Index- Constraints – Formal statement of optimal control system

– Calculus of variations – Function, Functional, Increment, Differential and variation and
optimum of function and functional – The basic variation problem Extrema of functions and
functional with conditions – variational approach to optimal control system

UNIT II LINEAR QUADRATIC OPTIMAL CONTROL SYSTEM (7+2 SKILL) 9

Problem formulation – Finite time Linear Quadratic regulator – Infinite time LQR system: Time
Varying case- Time-invariant case – Stability issues of Time-invariant regulator – Linear
Quadratic Tracking system: Fine time case and Infinite time case

UNIT III DISCRETE TIME OPTIMAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (7+2 SKILL) 9

Variational calculus for Discrete time systems – Discrete time optimal control systems:-
Fixedfinal state and open-loop optimal control and Free-final state and open-loop optimal
control - Discrete time linear state regulator system – Steady state regulator system

UNIT IV PONTRYAGIN MINIMUM PRINCIPLE (7+2 SKILL) 9

Pontryagin Minimum Principle – Dynamic Programming:- Principle of optimality, optimal
control using Dynamic Programming – Optimal Control of Continuous time and Discrete-time
systems – Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman Equation – LQR system using H-J-B equation

UNIT V CONSTRAINED OPTIMAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (7+2 SKILL) 9

Time optimal control systems – Fuel Optimal Control Systems- Energy Optimal Control
Systems – Optimal Control Systems with State Constraints
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini 10
Project/Assignment/Content Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE
questions/ etc)
1. Interactive MATLAB based project learning in an optimal control system.
2. Familiarize yourself with optimal control software tool boxes.
3. Arrange a group brainstorming process to generate new ideas and possible solutions to an
optimal control problem in any field.
4. Analyse the difference between optimal control systems with other types of control system.
133
 5. Homework assignment on optimal control.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Explain different type of optimal control problems such as time-optimal, fuel optimal,
energy optimal control problems.
CO2 Design Linear Quadratic Regulator for Time-invariant and Time-varying Linear system
(Continuous time and Discrete-time systems)
CO3 Design optimal controller using Dynamic Programming Approach and H-J-B equation.
CO4 Explain the Pontryagin Minimum Principle.
CO5 Design optimal controller in the presence of state constraints and time optimal
controller.
CO6 Understand the concepts of dynamic programming
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Donald E. Kirk, Optimal Control Theory – An Introduction, Dover Publications, Inc. Mineola,
New York, 2012, 10th Edition.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. D. Subbaram Naidu, Optimal Control Systems, CRC Press, New York, 2003, 1 st Edition.
2. Frank L. Lewis, Draguna Vrabie, Vassilis L. Syrmos, Optimal Control, 3rd Edition, Wiley
Publication, 2012, 3rd Edition.
3. Yan Wang, Cheng-Lin Liu, Zhi-Cheng Ji, Quantitative Analysis and Optimal Control of
Energy Efficiency in Discrete Manufacturing System, Springer, 2020, 1st Edition.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1 https://in.mathworks.com/discovery/optimal-control.html#lqrlqg
2 https://www.codeproject.com/Articles/863257/Simple-Software-for-Optimal-Control
3 https://joss.theoj.org/papers/10.21105/joss.02809
4 https://www.ieee-ras.org/model-based-optimization-for-robotics/resources/optimization-
tools
5 https://www.vlab.co.in/
6 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/16-323-principles-of-optimal-control-spring-2008/

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 - 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 - 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO6 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
Avg. 2 2 1.75 2 1 1.3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

134
TIEE3036 ADAPTIVE CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on how to recursively estimate the parameters of discrete input
– output models using recursive parameter estimation methods
 To make the student understand the principles of STR, MRAC and Gain scheduling.
 To make the student design simple adaptive controllers for linear systems using
STR, MRAC and Gain scheduling

UNIT I INTRODUCTION (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction - Adaptive Schemes - The adaptive Control Problem – Applications-Parameter
estimation:-LS, RLS: and ERLS

UNIT II GAIN SCHEDULING (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction- The principle - Design of gain scheduling controllers- Nonlinear transformations -
application of gain scheduling - Auto-tuning techniques: Methods based on Relay feedback.

UNIT III DETERMINISTIC SELF-TUNING REGULATORS (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction- Pole Placement design - Indirect Self-tuning regulators - direct self-tuning
regulators – Disturbances with known characteristics

UNIT IV STOCHASTIC AND PREDICTIVE SELF-TUNING REGULATORS (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction – Design of minimum variance controller - Design of moving average controller -
stochastic self-tuning regulators

UNIT V MODEL – REFERENCE ADAPTIVE SYSTEM (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction- MIT rule – Determination of adaptation gain - Lyapunov theory –Design of
MRAS using Lyapunov theory – Relations between MRAS and STR.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini 10

Project/Assignment/Content Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE
questions/ etc)
1 Learn any one relevant software tool (MATLAB/ SCILAB/ LABVIEW/ Equivalent open
source software)
2 Design of gain scheduling adaptive control using any one software tool
3 Analysis/Problem Solving - Ability to identify and define problems and solutions
4 Design and verification of MRAC by simulation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Ability to apply the estimation algorithm to estimate the parameters of the process.(L3)
CO2 Ability to apply the adaptive control concepts to control a process. (L3)
CO3 Use appropriate software tools for design of adaptive controllers and analysis of the
process. (L5)
CO4 Identify, formulate, carry out research by designing suitable adaptive schemes for
complex instrumentation problem. (L5)
CO5 Apply the concepts to design adaptive control for multidisciplinary problem(L3)
CO6 Choose the techniques for self and lifelong learning to keep in pace with the new
technology(L3)
135
TEXT BOOKS:
1. K.J. Astrom and B. J. Wittenmark, “Adaptive Control”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education Inc., second Edition 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. T. Soderstorm and Petre Stoica, “System Identification”, Prentice Hall International(UK)
Ltd., 1989, 1st Edition.
2. Lennart Ljung, “System Identification: Theory for the User”, Second Edition, Prentice
Hall, 1999.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102113/
2 https://in.mathworks.com/help/slcontrol/adaptive-control-design.html
3 https://in.mathworks.com/videos/nonlinear-model-based-adaptive-robust-controller-
in-an-oil-and-gas-wireline-operation-1637577967956.html
4 https://www.dynalog-us.com/adaptive-robot-control.htm
5 https://www.vlab.co.in/
MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO6 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
Avg. 3 2.3 2.3 2.3 1 1 1 3 1 1.6 1 1 2 2 2

136
TIEE3037 MACHINE MONITORING SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students familiarize with the concept of condition-based
maintenance for effective utilization of machines.
 To Impart the knowledge of artificial intelligence for machinery fault diagnosis.
 To give basic knowledge on vibration monitoring.
 To study the machinery vibrations using signal processing techniques.
 To provide knowledge on FMECA.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE CONDITION MONITORING (7+2 SKILL) 9

Machinery condition monitoring - Present status - Fault prognosis - Future needs.

UNIT II MACHINERY MAINTENANCE (7+2 SKILL) 9

Maintenance strategies – Reactive, Preventive, and Predictive – Benefits of planned
maintenance – Bath tub curve – Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis (FMECA).

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO MACHINERY VIBRATION AND MONITORING (7+2 SKILL) 9

Characteristics of Vibration systems – Mode shapes & operational deflection shapes –
Experimental modal analysis – Principles of vibration monitoring – Machinery faults diagnosed
by vibration analysis.

UNIT IV SIGNAL PROCESSING IN MACHINERY MONITORING (7+2 SKILL) 9

FFT analysis – Time domain analysis – Time-frequency analysis – Signal filtering – Cepstrum
analysis – Health condition of compressor & engine.

UNIT V MACHINE LEARNING FOR CONDITION MONITORING (7+2 SKILL) 9

Machine Learning: Feature extraction and feature selection methods – Feature reduction –
Classification techniques – Case studies of condition monitoring in Nuclear plant components,
Distillation column.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/
Content Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 10
1 Survey of critical machinery that requires monitoring system.
2 Exposure to practical machinery vibration & monitoring system presently in use.
3 Carryout FMECA using software.
4 Analyze the health condition of any machinery.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Ability to identify the faults in machinery L1.
CO2 Choose the proper maintenance strategies and condition monitoring techniques for
identification of failure in a machine L3.
CO3 Construct a classifier model for machine learning based fault diagnosis L5.
CO4 Predict the faulty component in a machine by analyzing the acquired vibration
signals L2.
CO5 Ability to analyze & build a model using modern tools L4.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cornelius SchefferandPareshGirdhar, “Practical Machinery Vibration Analysis and Predictive
Maintenance”, Elsevier, 2004, 1st Edition.

137
 2. A. R. Mohanty, “Machinery Condition Monitoring: Principles and Practices” , CRC Press,
Taylor & Francis, 1st Edition, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1 Stephen Marsland, Machine Learning: An Algorithmic Perspective, 2nd Edition, 2014, CRC,
Press.
2. Collacot, “Mechanical Fault Diagnosis and Condition Monitoring”, Chapman- Hall, 1 st Edition,
2011.
3. Davies, “Handbook of Condition Monitoring – Techniques and Methodology”, Springer, 1 st
Edition, 2011.
4. Ian H. Witten, Eibe Frank, Mark A. Hall, Data Mining: Practical Machine Learning Tools and
Techniques, Elsevier, 3rd Edition 2011.
5. Ferdinand van der Heijden, Robert Duin, Dick de Ridder, David M. J. Tax, Classification,
Parameter Estimation and State Estimation: An Engineering Approach Using MATLAB, John
Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2017.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs29/preview
2 https://www.udemy.com/topic/maintenance-management/
3 https://www.vi-institute.org/analyst-categories/
4 https://in.mathworks.com/help/predmaint/ug/condition-monitoring-and-prognostics-using-
vibration-signals.html
MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

COs POs PSOs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO4 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
Avg. 2.4 2.2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

138
 DIVERSIFIED COURSES

TIEE3038 ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Students will be able to:
 understand the various types of energy storage Technologies.
 analyze thermal storage system.
 analyze different battery storage technologies
 analyze the thermodynamics of Fuel Cell
 study the various applications of energy storage systems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION (7+2 SKILL) 9

Necessity of energy storage – types of energy storage – comparison of energy storage
technologies – Applications.

UNIT II THERMAL STORAGE SYSTEM (7+2 SKILL) 9

Thermal storage – Types – Modeling of thermal storage units – Simple water and rock bed
storage system – pressurized water storage system – Modelling of phase change storage system –
Simple units, packed bed storage units - Modelling using porous medium approach, Use of
TRNSYS.

UNIT III ELECTRICAL ENERGY STORAGE (7+2 SKILL) 9

Fundamental concept of batteries – measuring of battery performance, charging and discharging,
power density, energy density, and safety issues. Types of batteries – Lead Acid, Nickel –
Cadmium, Zinc Manganese dioxide, Li-ion batteries - Mathematical Modelling for Lead Acid
Batteries – Flow Batteries.

UNIT IV FUEL CELL (7+2 SKILL) 9

Fuel Cell – History of Fuel cell, Principles of Electrochemical storage – Types – Hydrogen oxygen
cells, Hydrogen air cell, Hydrocarbon air cell, alkaline fuel cell, detailed analysis – advantages and
disadvantages.

UNIT V ALTERNATE ENERGY STORAGE TECHNOLOGIES (7+2 SKILL) 9

Flywheel, Super capacitors, Principles & Methods – Applications, Compressed air Energy storage,
Concept of Hybrid Storage – Applications, Pumped Hydro Storage – Applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / etc) 10

1. Model, simulate and analyze the performance characteristics of thermal storage

systems
2. Develop a model for latent heat storage in phase changing materials.
3. Model, simulate and analyze the performance characteristics of Lead Acid Batteries
4. Model, simulate and analyze the performance characteristics of Fuel Cell
5. techno-economic analysis of different types of storage systems

139
 COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Understand different types storage technologies
CO2: Design a thermal storage system
CO3: Model battery storage system
CO4: Analyze the thermodynamics of fuel cell
CO5: Analyze the appropriate storage technologies for different applications
CO6: explore the alternate energy storage technologies.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Dincer and Mark A. Rosen, ‘Thermal Energy Storage Systems and Applications’,
John Wiley & Sons, 3rd Edition, 2021.
2. Ru-shi Liu, Lei Zhang and Xueliang sun, ‘Electrochemical technologies for energy storage
and conversion’, Wiley publications, 2nd Volume set, 2012.
3. James Larminie and Andrew Dicks, ‘Fuel cell systems Explained’, Wiley publications, 3 rd
Edition, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Lunardini.V.J, ‘Heat Transfer in Cold Climates’, John Wiley and Sons 1981, 1 st
Edition.
2. Schmidt.F.W. and Willmott.A.J., ‘Thermal Energy Storage and Regeneration’,
Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1981, 1st Edition.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1. Prof. Subhasish Basu Majumder, “Electrochemical Energy Storage”, NPTEL Course,
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113105102.
2. Prof. PK Das, “Energy conservation and waste heat recovery”, NPTEL Course,
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105221.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 - 3
CO2 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - 3
CO3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - 3
CO4 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - 3
CO5 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - 3
CO6 - 3 - - - 2 - 1 - - - - 2 - 3
Avg 3 2 2 - - 2 - 1 - - - - 2 - 3

140
TIEE3039 HYBRID ENERGY TECHNOLOGY LT P C
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge about different types of hybrid energy systems.
 To analyze the various electrical Generators used for the Wind Energy Conversion Systems.
 To design the power converters used in SPV Systems.
 To analyze the various power converters used in hybrid energy systems and to understand the
importance of standalone and grid-connected operation in Hybrid renewable energy systems.
 To analyze the performance of the various hybrid energy systems

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEMS (7+2 Skill) 9

Hybrid Energy Systems – Need for Hybrid Energy Systems – Solar-Wind-Fuel Cell-Diesel, Wind-
Biomass-Diesel, Micro-Hydel-PV, Ocean and geyser energy - Classification of Hybrid Energy systems –
Importance of Hybrid Energy systems – Advantages and Disadvantages - Environmental aspects of
renewable energy - Impacts of renewable energy generation on the environment - Present Indian and
international energy scenario of conventional and RE sources - Ocean energy, Hydel Energy - Wind
Energy, Biomass energy, Hydrogen energy - Solar Photovoltaic (PV) and Fuel cells: Operating
principles and characteristics.

UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES FOR WIND ENERGY CONVERSION

SYSTEMS (WECS) (7+2 Skill) 9
Review of reference theory fundamentals –Construction, Principle of operation and analysis: Squirrel
Cage Induction Generator (SCIG), Doubly Fed Induction Generator (DFIG) - Permanent Magnet
Synchronous Generator (PMSG).

UNIT III POWER CONVERTERS AND ANALYSIS OF SOLAR PV SYSTEMS (7+2 Skill) 9
Power Converters for SPV Systems - Line commutated converters (inversion-mode) - Boost and buck-
boost converters- selection of inverter, battery sizing, array sizing - Analysis of SPV Systems - Block
diagram of the solar PV systems - Types of Solar PV systems: Stand-alone PV systems,

UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF POWER CONVERTERS FOR HYBRID ENERGY

SYSTEMS (7+2 Skill) 9
Introduction to Power Converters – Stand-alone Converters -AC-DC-AC converters: uncontrolled
rectifiers, PWM Inverters - Bi-Directional Converters - Grid-Interactive Inverters - Matrix converter –
Merits and Limitations.

UNIT V CASE STUDIES FOR HYBRID RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS (7+2 Skill) 9
Hybrid Systems- Range and type of Hybrid systems – Performance Analysis – Cost Analysis - Case
studies of Diesel-PV, Wind-PV-Fuel-cell, Micro-hydel-PV, Biomass-Diesel-Fuel-cell systems.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content Preparation

/ Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 10
1. Simulation of Wind energy conversion system
2. Simulation of power converters
3. Simulations of AC-DC-AC converters, PWM inverters and Matrix Converters with
Resistive and dynamic loads

141
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Analyze the impacts of hybrid energy technologies on the environment and
demonstrate them to harness electrical power.
CO2: Select a suitable Electrical machine for Wind Energy Conversion Systems and simulate
wind energy conversion system
CO3: Design the power converters such as AC-DC, DC-DC, and AC-AC converters for
SPV systems.
CO4: Analyze the power converters such as AC-DC, DC-DC, and AC-AC converters for
Hybrid energy systems.
CO5: Interpret the hybrid renewable energy systems.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Bahman Zohuri, “Hybrid Energy Systems”, Springer, First Edition, 2018.

2. S.M. Muyeen, “Wind Energy Conversion Systems”, Springer First Edition, 2012
3. Md. Rabiul Islam, Md. Rakibuzzaman Shah, Mohd Hasan Ali, "Emerging Power Converters for
Renewable Energy and Electric Vehicles", CRC Press, First Edison, 2021

REFERENCES:

1. Ernst Joshua, Wind Energy Technology, PHI, India, 2018, 3rd Edition.
2. S.N.Bhadra, D. Kastha, & S. Banerjee “Wind Electrical Systems”, Oxford University Press, 7 th
Impression, 2005.
3. Rashid.M. H “Power electronics Hand book”, Academic press,4th Edition, 2018.
4. Rai. G.D, “Non-conventional energy sources”, Khanna publishers, 6 th Edition, 2017.
5. Rai. G.D, “Solar energy utilization”, Khanna publishers, 3rd Edition, 1987.
6. Gray, L. Johnson, “Wind energy system”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2006.
7. B.H.Khan "Non-conventional Energy sources", Tata McGraw hill Publishing Company, New Delhi,
2017, 3rd Edition.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/engineering/hybrid-energy-system
2. https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/engineering/wind-energy-conversion-system
3. https://www.academia.edu/35619294/Modeling_and_Performance_Analysis_of_Solar_PV_S
4. System_and_DC_DC_Converters
5. https://www.mdpi.com/journal/energies/special_issues/Power_Converter_Electric_Machines
6. _Renewable_Energy_Systems_Transportation
7. https://www.intechopen.com/chapters/64317

142
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs
POs PSOs

COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3

TIEE3040 DESIGN AND MODELLING OF RENEWABLE LTPC

ENERGY SYSTEMS 300 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To review the renewable energy systems and technology
 To learn the Single phase grid-connected photovoltaic systems and three phase
photovoltaic systems
 To illustrate the small wind energy systems
 To simulate the Doubly-fed induction generator based WECS

UNIT I RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS: TECHNOLOGY OVERVIEW AND

PERSPECTIVES (7+2 Skill) 9

Introduction-State of the Art- Examples of Recent Research and Development Challenges and
Future Trends

UNIT II SINGLE-PHASE GRID-CONNECTED PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS (7+2 Skill) 9

Introduction- Demands for Grid-Connected PV Systems-Power Converter Technology for Single-
Phase PV Systems, Transformer less AC-Module Inverters (Module-Integrated PV Converters,
Transformer less Single-Stage String Inverters, DC-Module Converters in Transformer less
Double-Stage PV Systems

UNIT III THREE-PHASE PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS: STRUCTURES,

TOPOLOGIES (7+2 Skill) 9
Introduction-PV Inverter Structures, Three-Phase PV Inverter Topologies- -Control Building Blocks
for PV Inverters, Modulation Strategies for Three-Phase PV Inverters, Implementation of the
Modulation Strategies., Grid Synchronization, Implementation of the PLLs for Grid Synchronization,
Current Control, Implementation of the Current Controllers, Maximum Power Point Tracking.

UNIT IV SMALL WIND ENERGY SYSTEMS (7+2 Skill) 9

Introduction-Generator Selection for Small-Scale Wind Energy Systems- Turbine Selection for
Wind Energy- Self-Excited Induction Generators for Small Wind Energy Applications- Permanent
Magnet Synchronous Generators for Small Wind Power Applications- Grid-Tied Small Wind
Turbine Systems-Magnus Turbine–Based Wind Energy System
143
UNIT V DOUBLY-FED INDUCTION GENERATOR-BASED WECS (7+2 Skill) 9
Introduction – modelling of induction machine in machine variable form and arbitrary reference
frame, modelling of Doubly-fed Induction Generator.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 10
1. Simulation of inverter for PV systems
2. Simulation of WECS with DFIG
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1. https://www.mdpi.com/journal/applsci/topical_collections/Susta_Energy
2. https://www.mathworks.com/help/sps/ug/single-phase-grid-connected-in-pv-system.html
3. https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/engineering/three-phase-inverter
4. academia.edu/32704493/Wind_Power_Lecture_Notes
5. https://www.syscop.de/files/2018ss/WES/handouts/script.pdf
6. https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/engineering/wound-rotor-induction-generator

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Review the perspectives of renewable energy systems
CO2: Integrate photovoltaic systems with grid
CO3: Study inverter for PV systems
CO4: Elaborate the working of small wind power systems
CO5: Study the features of induction machine and doubly fed induction machine
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ahmad Azar, Nashwa Kamal, "Design, Analysis and Applications of Renewable Energy
Systems", Academic Press, First Edition, 2021
2. Ahmad Azar, Nashwa Kamal, "Renewable Energy Systems", Academic Press, First Edition,
2021
3. Nabil Derbel, Quanmin ZhuModeling, "Identification and Control Methods in Renewable Energy
Systems" , Springer, First Edition, 2019

REFERENCES:
1. Power Conversion and Control of Wind Energy Systems, Bin Wu, 2011, Wiley-IEEE, 1 st
Edition.
2. Wind Electrical Systems, S.N. Bhadra, 2005, Oxford, 7th Impression.
3. Wind Power Integration - Connection and System Operational Aspects, Brendan Fox, 2014,
IET, 2nd Edition.
4. Renewable Energy Devices and Systems with Simulations in MATLAB and ANSYS, Frede
Blaabjerg, Dan M. Ionel, CRC press, 2017, 1st Edition.

144
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 - 2
CO2 3 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 3 3 3
Avg 3 2 3 2.8 2 - - - - - - - 3 3 2.8

TIEE3041 GRID INTEGRATING TECHNIQUES AND CHALLENGES LTPC

2023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

 To study about the present power Scenario

 To model a micro grid system
 To model power converter for grid interconnection
 To integrate wind energy conversion system with grid
 To simulate power converters like three phase inverters and DC-DC converters

UNIT I PRESENT POWER SCENARIO IN INDIA 6

Introduction - Thermal Power Plant , Components of Thermal Power Plant , Major Thermal Power
Plants in India- Gas-Based Power Generation - Nuclear Power Plants -Hydropower Generation -
Pumped Storage Plants - Solar Power - Wind Energy – Power plants India

UNIT II POWER GRIDS 6

Introduction -Electric Power ,Background , The Construction of a Power Grid System , Basic
Concepts of Power Grids -Load Models - Transformers in Electric Power Grids - Modelling a Microgrid
System

UNIT III MODELING OF CONVERTERS IN POWER GRID DISTRIBUTED 6

GENERATION SYSTEMS
Introduction - Single-Phase DC/AC Inverters with Two Switches, Three-Phase DC/AC Inverters, Pulse
Width Modulation Methods, The Triangular, The Identity Method, Analysis of DC/AC Three-Phase
Inverters. Micro grid of Renewable Energy Systems- DC/DC Converters in Green Energy -Pulse Width
Modulation -Sizing of an Inverter for Microgrid Operation, Sizing of a Rectifier for Microgrid Operation,
The Sizing of DC/DC Converters for Micro grid

145
UNIT IV WIND ENERGY SYSTEM GRID INTEGRATION 6
Introduction- Significance of Electrical Power Quality in Wind Power System- Integration Issues in
Grid-Connected Wind Energy- Effect of Power Quality Issues, Importance of Custom Power
Devices- Power Quality Point of View.

UNIT V GRID INTER CONNECTION 6

Grid Code requirements-Grid integration of WECS-Grid Integration of PV systems

30 PERIODS

LAB COMPONENT 30 PERIODS

1. Develop a model for the control of DC micro grid for non linear loads
2. Simulation study of three phase inverters with fixed and sine PWM techniques, Simulation and Design of
buck/boost converters.
3. Simulate a Grid Connected Wind Energy System with STATCOM and investigate the improvement in
power quality.
TOTAL: 30+30 = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students able to
CO1 Review the power sector scenario in India.
CO2 Model a microgrid system
CO3 Model a converter for power grid distributed system.
CO4 Integrate wind energy system.

CO5 Simulate three phase inverter with fixed and sine PWM.
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Brian D’Andrade “The Power Grid”, Academic Press, 1st Edition, 2017.
2. Yang Han, "Modeling and Control of Power Electronic Converters for Microgrid Applications",
Springer, 1st Edition 2022.
3. Siegfried Heier, "Grid Integration of Wind Energy: Onshore and Offshore Conversion Systems",
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2014, 3rd Edition.
REFERENCES:

1. Integration of Renewable Energy Sources with Smart Grid, M. Kathiresh, A. Mahaboob Subahani,
and G.R. Kanaga chidambaresan, Scrivener & Wiley, 2021, 1 st Edition.
2. Control and Operation of Grid-Connected Wind Energy Systems, Ali M. Eltamaly, Almoataz Y.
Abdelaziz, Ahmed G. Abo-Khalil, Springer 2021, 1st Edition.
3. Design of smart power grid renewable energy systems, Third Edition, Ali Keyhani, Wiley 2019.
4. Power Electronic Converters, Teuvo Suntio, Tuomas Messo, Joonas Puukko, Wiley 2017, 1 st Edition.
5. Fundamentals of Power Electronics with MATLAB, Randall Shaffer, Laxmi publications, 2013, 2 nd
Edition.
6. Power Conversion and Control of Wind Energy Systems, Bin Wu, 2011, Wiley-IEEE, 1 st Edition.
7. Wind Power Integration - Connection and System Operational Aspects, Brendan Fox, 2014, IET, 2nd
Edition.
8. Renewable Energy Devices and Systems with Simulations in MATLAB and ANSYS, Frede Blaabjerg,
146
 Dan M. Ionel, CRC press, 2017, 1st Edition.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://www.academia.edu/14628492/Current_Power_Scenario_In_India
2. https://energyeducation.ca/encyclopedia/Electrical_grid
3. https://www.academia.edu/32120081/Power_Converters_Modeling_in_Matlab_Simulink_for_Micr
4. ogrid_Simulations_Power_Converters_Modeling_in_Matlab_Simulink_for_Microgrid_Simulations
5. https://dnv.com/services/wind-farm-control-and-grid-integration
6. https://www.wind-energy-the-facts.org/images/chapter2.pdf

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 - 2 - 3 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 1 3 3 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 3

TIEE3042 SUSTAINABLE AND ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLY LT P C

HV INSULATION SYSTEM 3003

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To Know about the products related with sustainable applicaton.
 To learn about Green Gaseous, liquid solid insulators.
 To understand the standards for green insulation systems.

UNIT I SUSTAINABLE AND ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY AND PRODUCTS 9

Carbon print, global warming potential, environment requirement for any product and system.

UNIT II ALTERNATE GREEN GASEOUS INSULATORS 9

SF6 gas and its hazardous environmental effects, alternate gases, gaseous mixtures and other
sources and it’s properties.

UNIT III ALTERNATE GREEN LIQUID INSULATORS 9

hazardous effects of existing liquid dielectric materials (such as organic oil), alternate sources of
environmental friendly liquid such as ester oil, vegetable oils dielectric and it’s properties.

UNIT IV ALTERNATE GREEN SOLID INSULATORS 9

hazardous effects of existing solid dielectric materials, alternate sources of environmental friendly
solid dielectric and its properties.

UNIT V EVOLVING STANDARDS FOR GREEN INSULATION SYSTEMS 9

Requirements, evolving standards of management, testing, usage and disposal of alternate
147
insulation systems, Major applications and standards

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

REFERENCES:
1. https://www.iso.org/standard/79064.html
2. https://www.ictfootprint.eu/en/iec-tr-627252013-factsheet
3. https://www.iec.ch/dyn/www/f?p=103:7:0::::FSP_ORG_ID,FSP_LANG_ID:1275,25
4. https://www.iec.ch/ords/f?p=103:41:628762356646470::::FSP_ORG_ID,FSP_LANG_ID:323
7, 25
5. https://www.iec.ch/dyn/www/f?p=103:7:0::::FSP_ORG_ID,FSP_LANG_ID:1299,25
6. https://www.iec.ch/sdgs/sdg13
7. http://highperformanceinsulation.eu/wp- content/uploads/ 2016/08/ sustainability_a_guide.pdf

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Know about sustainable and environmental energy and products.
CO2: Describe the alternate green gaseous insulators.
CO3: Describe the alternate green liquid insulators
CO4: Describe the alternate green solid insulators
CO5: Elaborate the standards for Green insulation systems.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 - 3 - - - 3 - - - - - 3 - 3
CO2 3 - 3 - - - 3 - - - - - 3 - 3
CO3 3 - 3 - - - 3 - - - - - 3 - 3
CO4 3 - 3 - - - 3 - - - - - 3 - 3
CO5 3 - 3 - - - 3 - - - - - 3 - 3
Avg 3 - 3 - - - 3 - - - - - 3 - 3

TIEE3043 POWER SYSTEM TRANSIENTS LT P C

3003

OBJECTIVES:
 To study the generation of switching transients and their control using circuit – theoretical concept.
 To study the mechanism of lighting strokes and the production of lighting surges.
 To study the propagation, reflection and refraction of travelling waves.
 To study the impact of voltage transients caused by faults, circuit breaker action, load rejection on
integrated power system.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SURVEY (7+2 Skill) 9

Sources of different types of transients - RL circuit transient with sine wave excitation - double
frequency transients - basic transforms of the RLC circuit transients - study of transients in
system planning - Importance of grounding.

148
UNIT II SWITCHING TRANSIENTS (7+2 Skill) 9
Basic concept of switching transients - resistance switching and equivalent circuit for interrupting
the resistor current - load switching and equivalent circuit - waveforms for transient voltage across
the load and the switch - normal and abnormal switching transients. Current suppression - current
chopping - effective equivalent circuit - capacitance switching with a restrike, with multiple
restrikes - ferro resonance.

UNIT III LIGHTNING TRANSIENTS (7+2 Skill) 9

Theories of cloud formation - mechanism of lightning discharges and characteristics of lightning
strokes – model for lightning stroke - factors contributing to good line design - protection using
ground wires - tower footing resistance - Interaction between lightning and power system.

UNIT IV TRAVELING WAVES ON TRANSMISSION LINE COMPUTATION OF

TRANSIENTS (7+2 Skill) 9
Computation of transients - transient response of systems with series and shunt lumped
parameters and distributed lines. Traveling wave concept - step response - Bewely’s lattice
diagram - standing waves and natural frequencies - reflection and refraction of travelling waves.
Computation of overvoltages using EMTP.

UNIT V TRANSIENTS IN INTEGRATED POWER SYSTEM 9

The short line and kilometric fault - distribution of voltages in a power system - Line dropping and
load rejection - voltage transients on closing and reclosing lines - overvoltage induced by faults -
switching surges on integrated system Qualitative application of EMTP for transient computation.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 8
1. Simulation of circuit transients
2. Computation of over voltages for switching surges
3. Computation of over voltages for lightning surges
4. Computation of transients

COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing the course, the students will be above to
CO1 : Explain the principles of transients and its concepts
CO2 : Know the different types of switching transients and the way to draw the necessary
equivalent circuit.
CO3: Explain the concepts behind lighting and the way to protect the same.
CO4: Compute the transient behavior in transmission line
CO5: Explain the behavior of the Circuit during switching and to learn the simulation tool.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allan Greenwood, ‘Electrical Transients in Power Systems’, Wiley Inter Science, New York, 2 nd
Edition, 1991.
2. Pritindra Chowdhari, “Electromagnetic transients in Power System”, John Wiley and Sons Inc.,
Second Edition, 2009.
3. C.S. Indulkar, D.P.Kothari, K. Ramalingam, ‘Power System Transients – A statistical approach’,
PHI Learning Private Limited, Second Edition, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. M.S.Naidu and V.Kamaraju, ‘High Voltage Engineering’, Tata McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, 2013.
2. R.D. Begamudre, ‘Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering’, Wiley Eastern Limited,
149
 1986.
3. Y.Hase, Handbook of Power System Engineering,” Wiley India, 2012.
4. J.L.Kirtley, “Electric Power Principles, Sources, Conversion, Distribution and use,” Wiley, 2012.

MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs

POs PSOs
COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 P07 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02 PS03
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3

TIEE3044 PLC PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To know about the basics of PLC and Automation
To understand the importance of Automation
To explore various types and manufactures of PLCs.
To introduce types of programming languages of PLC and some exercise few programs.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION (7+2 SKILL) 9

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)- Block diagram of PLC- Programming languages of PLC-
Basic instruction sets- Design of alarm and interlocks- Networking of PLC- Overview of safety of
PLC with case studies- Process Safety Automation: Levels of process safety through use of
PLCs- IEC 61131-3 Standard - Application of international standards in process safety control.

UNIT II IEC 61131-3 (7+2 SKILL) 9

Rails- Rungs- Relay Logic- Latch switch- Timers- Counters- Boolean logics- Math Instructions-
Data manipulation Instructions- Requirement of communication networks for PLC, PLC to PC
Communication to computer- FBD equivalent to LL- FBD Programming- IL- SFC-ST.

UNIT III SCADA (7+2 SKILL) 9

Elements of SCADA system- History of SCADA, Remote Terminal Unit- Discrete control- Analog
control, Master Terminal Unit- Operator interface.

UNIT IV HART and Field Bus (7+2 SKILL) 9

Introduction- Evolution of signal standards- HART communication protocol- communication
modes- HART networks- HART commands- HART and OSI model- Field bus- Architecture-
Basic requirements of field Busstandard- Field bus Topology- Interoperability- Interchangeability.

150
UNIT V PLC PROGRAMMING (7+2 SKILL) 9
Exercise in Programming Languages from IEC 61131-3: Traffic Light Control- Two way- Four
way – Water Level Control- Automatic Material Sorting System- Automatic Bottle Filling System,
Code Converters- DC motor Control- Alarm Circuit.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini

Project/Assignment/Content Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE 10
questions/ etc)

1 Taking Local area to implement simple closed loop system for any system using PLC.
2 Making a complete automated control loop with Supervisory and HMI system.
3 Implementing an Alarm based control scheme and run in a simulated environment.
4 Designing an entire PLC logic for filling and draining water tank automatically.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the basics and need for Automation in industries .
CO2 Explain the logic and flow of any particular programming written for a process .
CO3 Apply the knowledge to design or improve an existing program to increase productivity of any
process .
CO4 Breakdown SCADA architecture and communication protocols.
CO5 Build and logic in any of the programming languages from IEC- 61131- 3 standard .
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 5th Edition, McGraw- Hill, New York,
2019.
2. Stuart Boyer A, “SCADA: Supervisory control and data Acquisition”, Fourth Edition, ISA- The
Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society,2010

REFERENCES

1. Bolton. W, “Programmble Logic Controllers”, Elsevier Newnes, 6th Edition 2015.

List of Open-Source Software/ Learning website:

1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105062
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105088
3 http://www.nitttrc.edu.in/nptel/courses/video/105105201/lec56.pdf
4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106022
5 https://new.siemens.com/global/en/products/automation/systems/industrial/plc/logo/logo-
software.html
6 https://componentsearchengine.com/library/proteus?gclid=CjwKCAjw_ISWBhBkEiwAdqxb9o
kU2ZZHcQoa9fSRK2Uq41Rq0GZxdGUP6_6GlBv77p4JqGt_iDAljhoCksEQAvD_BwE

151
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs
POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 2 2 - - - 1 - 1 - - - - -
CO2 2 2 2 2 - - - 1 - 1 - - - - -
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - 1 - 1 - - - - -
CO4 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 - 1 - - - - -
CO5 3 2 2 2 - - - 1 - 1 - - - - -
AVg. 2.6 2.2 2.2 2 - - - 1 - 1 - - - - -

TIEE3045 BIG DATA ANALYTICS L T PC

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand big data.
 To learn and use NoSQL big data management.
 To learn mapreduce analytics using Hadoop and related tools.
 To work with map reduce applications
 To understand the usage of Hadoop related tools for Big Data Analytics

UNIT I UNDERSTANDING BIG DATA 5

Introduction to big data – convergence of key trends – unstructured data – industry examples of big
data – web analytics – big data applications– big data technologies – introduction to Hadoop –
open source technologies – cloud and big data – mobile business intelligence – Crowd sourcing
analytics – inter and trans firewall analytics.

UNIT II NOSQL DATA MANAGEMENT 7

Introduction to NoSQL – aggregate data models – key-value and document data models –
relationships – graph databases – schemaless databases – materialized views – distribution
models – master-slave replication – consistency - Cassandra – Cassandra data model –
Cassandra examples – Cassandra clients

UNIT III MAP REDUCE APPLICATIONS 6

MapReduce workflows – unit tests with MRUnit – test data and local tests – anatomy of
MapReduce job run – classic Map-reduce – YARN – failures in classic Map-reduce and YARN –
job scheduling – shuffle and sort – task execution – MapReduce types – input formats – output
formats.

UNIT IV BASICS OF HADOOP 6

Data format – analyzing data with Hadoop – scaling out – Hadoop streaming – Hadoop pipes –
design of Hadoop distributed file system (HDFS) – HDFS concepts – Java interface – data flow –

152
Hadoop I/O – data integrity – compression – serialization – Avro – file-based data structures -
Cassandra – Hadoop integration.

UNIT V HADOOP RELATED TOOLS 6

Hbase – data model and implementations – Hbase clients – Hbase examples – praxis. Pig – Grunt
– pig data model – Pig Latin – developing and testing Pig Latin scripts. Hive – data types and file
formats – HiveQL data definition – HiveQL data manipulation – HiveQL queries.
TOTAL:30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of this course, students will be able to:
CO1:Describe big data and use cases from selected business domains.
CO2:Explain NoSQL big data management.
CO3:Install, configure, and run Hadoop and HDFS.
CO4:Perform map-reduce analytics using Hadoop.
CO5:Use Hadoop-related tools such as HBase, Cassandra, Pig, and Hive for big data analytics.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 30 PERIODS

1. Downloading and installing Hadoop; Understanding different Hadoop modes. Startup scripts,
Configuration files.
2. Hadoop Implementation of file management tasks, such as Adding files and directories,
retrieving files and Deleting files
3. Implement of Matrix Multiplication with Hadoop Map Reduce
4. Run a basic Word Count Map Reduce program to understand Map Reduce Paradigm.
5. Installation of Hive along with practice examples.
7. Installation of HBase, Installing thrift along with Practice examples
8. Practice importing and exporting data from various databases.

Software Requirements:
Cassandra, Hadoop, Java, Pig, Hive and HBase.

TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Michael Minelli, Michelle Chambers, and AmbigaDhiraj, "Big Data, Big Analytics: Emerging
Business Intelligence and Analytic Trends for Today's Businesses", Wiley, 2013.
2. Eric Sammer, "Hadoop Operations", O'Reilley, 2012.
3. Sadalage, Pramod J. “NoSQL distilled”, 2013

REFERENCES:
1. E. Capriolo, D. Wampler, and J. Rutherglen, "Programming Hive", O'Reilley, 2012.
2. Lars George, "HBase: The Definitive Guide", O'Reilley, 2011.
3. Eben Hewitt, "Cassandra: The Definitive Guide", O'Reilley, 2010.
4. Alan Gates, "Programming Pig", O'Reilley, 2011.

153
 MAPPING OF COs WITH POs AND PSOs
COs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 2 3 1 1 3 3
2 3 3 2 3 2 - - - 2 2 3 3 2 3 2
3 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 2 2 1 2 2 3 3
4 2 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 2 3 2 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 1 3 2 3 2 3
AVg. 2.8 3 2.8 2.8 2.8 - - - 2.2 1.8 2.6 2 2.2 2.8 2.6

TIGE3801 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Sketch the Evolution of Management.
 Extract the functions and principles of management.
 Learn the application of the principles in an organization.
 Study the various HR related activities.
 Analyze the position of self and company goals towards business.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur- types of managers-
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management –Scientific, human relations, system and
contingency approaches– Types of Business organization- Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises- Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.

UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – Planning process – Types of planning – Objectives – Setting
objectives – Policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.

UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization chart – Organization
structure – Types – Line and staff authority – Departmentalization – delegation of authority –
Centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR
Planning, Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management, Career
planning and management.

UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour– Motivation – Motivation theories – Motivational
techniques – Job satisfaction – Job enrichment – Leadership – types and theories of leadership
– Communication – Process of communication – Barrier in communication – Effective
communication – Communication and IT.

154
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – Budgetary and non - Budgetary control techniques – Use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – Control
and performance – Direct and preventive control – Reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling.
CO2: Have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management.
CO3: Ability to understand management concept of organizing.
CO4: Ability to understand management concept of directing.
CO5: Ability to understand management concept of controlling.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” Tata McGraw Hill,1998.
2. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, “ Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd.,
10th Edition, 2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Robert Kreitner and MamataMohapatra, “ Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
2. Stephen A. Robbins and David A. Decenzo and Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of
Management” Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
3. Tripathy PC and Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999.

POs PSOs
COs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 1 1
2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
3 1 - 2 - - 1 - 2 - 1 1 - - 2
4 - 1 1 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - 1 1 1
5 1 - - 1 1 - - - 3 - 1 1 - 1
AVg. 1.66 1 1 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1.5 1 1.25

TIGE3802 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Teach the need for quality, its evolution, basic concepts, contribution of quality
gurus, TQMframework, Barriers and Benefits of TQM.
 Explain the TQM Principles for application.
 Define the basics of Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools,
Benchmarking and FMEA.
 Describe Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply
Techniqueslike QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
 Illustrate and apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

155
 UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions
of product and service quality –Definition of TQM-- Basic concepts of TQM - Gurus of
TQM (Brief introduction) -- TQM Framework- Barriers to TQM –Benefits of TQM.

UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Deming Philosophy, Quality Council, Quality statements and Strategic
planning- Customer Satisfaction –Customer Perception of Quality, Feedback,
Customer complaints, Service Quality, Kano Model and Customer retention –
Employee involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork,
Recognition & Reward and Performance Appraisal-- Continuous process
improvement –Juran Trilogy, PDSA cycle, 5S and Kaizen - Supplier partnership –
Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating and Relationship development.

UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six-sigma Process
Capability- Bench marking - Reasons to benchmark, Benchmarking process, What to
Bench Mark, Understanding Current Performance, Planning, Studying Others,
Learning from the data, Using the findings, Pitfalls and Criticisms of Benchmarking -
FMEA - Intent , Documentation, Stages: Design FMEA and Process FMEA.

UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function –
TPM – Concepts, improvement needs – Performance measures- Cost of Quality -
BPR.

UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction-Benefits of ISO Registration-ISO 9000 Series of Standards-Sector-
Specific Standards - AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements-
Implementation-Documentation- Internal Audits-Registration-ENVIRONMENTAL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of
ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001-Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Ability to apply TQM concepts in a selected enterprise.
CO2: Ability to apply TQM principles in a selected enterprise.
CO3: Ability to understand Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools,
Benchmarking andFMEA.
CO4: Ability to understand Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance
Measures and applyQFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
CO5: Ability to apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

COs- POs & PSOs MAPPING

COs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2 3
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 2
AVg. 2.5 3 3 2.6 3 2 3 3 2.5 2 3

156
 TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Bester field,MaryB.Sacre,
HemantUrdhwareshe and RashmiUrdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”,
Pearson Education Asia, RevisedThird Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth
Impression,2013.

REFERENCES:
1 Joel.E. Ross, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,Routledge.,2017.
2. Kiran.D.R, “Total Quality Management: Key concepts and case studies,
Butterworth –Heinemann Ltd, 2016.
3. Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford,
Third Edition, 2003.
4. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall
(India) Pvt. Ltd.,2006 .

TIGE3803 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the concept of Engineering Economics.
 Implement various micro economics concept in real life.
 Gaining knowledge in the field of macro economics to enable the students to have better
 understanding of various components of macro economics.
 Understanding the different procedures of pricing.
 Learn the various cost related concepts in micro economics.

UNIT I DEMAND & SUPPLY ANALYSIS 9

Managerial Economics - Relationship with other disciplines - Firms: Types, objectives
and goals - Managerial decisions - Decision analysis.Demand - Types of demand - Determinants
of demand - Demand function – Demand elasticity - Demand forecasting - Supply - Determinants
of supply - Supply function -Supply elasticity.

UNIT II PRODUCTION AND COST ANALYSIS 9

Production function - Returns to scale - Production optimization - Least cost input -
Isoquants - Managerial uses of production function.
Cost Concepts - Cost function - Determinants of cost - Short run and Long run cost
curves - Cost Output Decision - Estimation of Cost.

UNIT III PRICING 9

Determinants of Price - Pricing under different objectives and different market structures
- Price discrimination - Pricing methods in practice.

UNIT IV FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Balance sheet and related concepts - Profit & Loss Statement and related concepts - -
Financial Ratio Analysis - Cash flow analysis - Funds flow analysis - Comparative
financial statements - Analysis & Interpretation of financial statements.

157
UNIT V CAPITAL BUDGETING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9
Investments - Risks and return evaluation of investment decision - Average rate of return
- Payback Period - Net Present Value - Internal rate of return.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Students able to
CO1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will acquire the skills to apply the basics
of economics and cost analysis to engineering and take economically sound decisions
CO2: Evaluate the economic theories, cost concepts and pricing policies
CO3: Understand the market structures and integration concepts
CO4: Understand the measures of national income, the functions of banks and concepts of
globalization
CO5: Apply the concepts of financial management for project appraisal

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi,2001.

2. Managerial Economics: Analysis, Problems and Cases - P. L. Mehta, Edition, 13. Publisher,
Sultan Chand, 2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis” Engg.
Press, Texas, 2010.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Macmillan, New
York, 2011.
4. Zahid A khan: Engineering Economy, "Engineering Economy", Dorling Kindersley, 2012
5. Dr. S. N. Maheswari and Dr. S.K. Maheshwari: Financial Accounting, Vikas, 2009

MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

COs POs PSOs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 3
2 3 2 2
3 2
4 2 3 3 2 2 3
5 3 3 3 2 2 2
AVg. 2.5 2.4 3 2 2 1.8 2.6 2

TIGE3804 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to staffing,
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to training,
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to performance
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to compensation
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to human factors
consideration and compliance with human resource requirements.
158
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 9
The importance of human resources – Objective of Human Resource Management - Human
resource policies - Role of human resource manager.

UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9

Importance of Human Resource Planning – Internal and External sources of Human Resources -
Recruitment - Selection – Socialization.

UNIT III TRAINING AND EXECUTIVE DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of training and Executive development methods – purpose – benefits.

UNIT IV EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION 9

Compensation plan – Reward – Motivation – Career Development - Mentor – Protege
relationships.

UNIT V PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND CONTROL 9

Performance evaluation – Feedback - The control process – Importance – Methods – grievances –
Causes – Redressal methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Students would have gained knowledge on the various aspects of HRM
CO2: Students will gain knowledge needed for success as a human resources professional.
CO3: Students will develop the skills needed for a successful HR manager.
CO4: Students would be prepared to implement the concepts learned in
the workplace.
CO5: Students would be aware of the emerging concepts in the field of HRM

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Decenzo and Robbins, "Human Resource Management", 8th Edition, Wiley, 2007.
2. John Bernardin. H., "Human Resource Management – An Experimental Approach", 5th Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2013, New Delhi.

REFERENCES:
1. Luis R,. Gomez-Mejia, DavidB. Balkin and Robert L. Cardy, “Managing Human Resources", 7th
Edition, PHI, 2012.
2. Dessler, "Human Resource Management", Pearson Education Limited, 2007.

COs- POs & PSOs MAPPING

COs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 2.8 2.8 1.8 2.6 2.6 2.2 1.8 1.8 2.4 1 1.4 1 1 1.4 1

159
 TIGE3805 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The student should be made to:

 Learn the Evolution of Knowledge management.

 Be familiar with tools.
 Be exposed to Applications.
 Be familiar with some case studies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction: An Introduction to Knowledge Management - The foundations of knowledge
management- including cultural issues- technology applications organizational concepts and processes-
management aspects- and decision support systems. The Evolution of Knowledge management: From
Information Management to Knowledge Management - Key Challenges Facing the Evolution of
Knowledge Management - Ethics for Knowledge Management.

UNIT II CREATING THE CULTURE OF LEARNING AND KNOWLEDGE SHARING 9

Organization and Knowledge Management - Building the Learning Organization. Knowledge Markets:
Cooperation among Distributed Technical Specialists – Tacit Knowledge and Quality Assurance.

UNIT III KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT-THE TOOLS 9

Telecommunications and Networks in Knowledge Management - Internet Search Engines and
Knowledge Management - Information Technology in Support of Knowledge Management -
Knowledge Management and Vocabulary Control - Information Mapping in Information Retrieval -
Information Coding in the Internet Environment - Repackaging Information.

UNIT IV KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION 9

Components of a Knowledge Strategy - Case Studies (From Library to Knowledge Center, Knowledge
Management in the Health Sciences, Knowledge Management in Developing Countries).

UNIT V FUTURE TRENDS AND CASE STUDIES 9

Advanced topics and case studies in knowledge management - Development of a knowledge
management map/plan that is integrated with an organization's strategic and business plan - A case
study on Corporate Memories for supporting various aspects in the process life -cycles of an
organization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Understand the process of acquiry knowledge from experts
CO2: Understand the learning organization.
CO3: Use the knowledge management tools.
CO4: Develop knowledge management Applications.
CO5: Design and develop enterprise applications.

160
 COs- POs & PSOs MAPPING
COs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1
2 2 1
3 2 2
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1
AVg. 1 1.4 1 1 1.33

TEXT BOOK:
1. Srikantaiah, T.K., Koenig, M., “Knowledge Management for the Information Professional”
Information Today, Inc., 2000.

REFERENCE:
1. Nonaka, I., Takeuchi, H., “The Knowledge-Creating Company: How Japanese Companies
Create the Dynamics of Innovation”, Oxford University Press, 1995.

TIGE3806 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES

1 To study the basic concepts of management; approaches to management; contributors

to management studies; various forms of business organization and trade unions function
in professional organizations.
2 To study the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in professional
organization.
3 To study the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in professional
organization.
4 To learn the organizational theory in professional organization.
5 To learn the principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in professional
organization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT 9

Management: Introduction; Definition and Functions – Approaches to the study of Management –
Mintzberg’s Ten Managerial Roles – Principles of Taylor; Fayol; Weber; Parker – Forms of
Organization: Sole Proprietorship; Partnership; Company (Private and Public); Cooperative –
Public Sector Vs Private Sector Organization – Business Environment: Economic; Social; Political;
Legal – Trade Union: Definition; Functions; Merits & Demerits.

UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT - I 9

Planning: Characteristics; Nature; Importance; Steps; Limitation; Planning Premises; Strategic
Planning; Vision & Mission statement in Planning– Organizing: Organizing Theory; Principles; Types;
Departmentalization; Centralization and Decentralization; Authority & Responsibility – Staffing: Systems
Approach; Recruiting and Selection Process; Human Resource Development (HRD) Concept and
Design.

161
UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT - II 9
Directing (Leading): Leadership Traits; Style; Morale; Managerial Grids (Blake-Mounton, Reddin) –
Communication: Purpose; Model; Barriers – Controlling: Process; Types; Levels; Guidelines; Audit
(External, Internal, Merits); Preventive Control – Decision Making: Elements; Characteristics; Nature;
Process; Classifications.

UNIT IV ORGANIZATION THEORY 9

Organizational Conflict: Positive Aspects; Individual; Role; Interpersonal; Intra Group; Inter
Group; Conflict Management – Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory; Herzberg’s motivation-hygiene
theory; McClelland’s three needs motivation theory; Vroom’s valence-expectancy theory – Change
Management: Concept of Change; Lewin’s Process of Change Model; Sources of Resistance;
Overcoming Resistance; Guidelines to managing Conflict.

UNIT V PRODUCTIVITY AND MODERN TOPICS 9

Productivity: Concept; Measurements; Affecting Factors; Methods to Improve – Modern Topics
(concept, feature/characteristics, procedure, merits and demerits): Business Process Reengineering
(BPR); Benchmarking; SWOT/SWOC Analysis; Total Productive Maintenance; Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP); Management of Information Systems (MIS).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to

CO1 Explain basic concepts of management; approaches to management; contributors to

management studies; various forms of business organization and trade unions function in
professional organizations.

CO2 Discuss the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in professional
organization.
CO3 Apply the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in professional
organization.
CO4 Discuss the organizational theory in professional organization.
CO5 Apply principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in professional
organization.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. M. Govindarajan and S. Natarajan, “Principles of Management”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2009.
2. Koontz. H. and Weihrich. H., “Essentials of Management: An International Perspective”, 8 th
Edition, Tata McGrawhill, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Joseph J, Massie, “Essentials of Management”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 1987.
2. Saxena, P. K., “Principles of Management: A Modern Approach”, Global India
Publications, 2009.
3. S.Chandran, “Organizational Behaviours”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 1994.
4. Richard L. Daft, “Organization Theory and Design”, South Western College Publishing, 11 th
Edition, 2012.
5. S. TrevisCerto, “Modern Management Concepts and Skills”, Pearson Education, 2018.

162
 MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1

5 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1

163